1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children false
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command default
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
155 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
156 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
157 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
169 by the \SpecialChar LyX
174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
176 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
177 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
178 Documentation mailing list:
179 \begin_inset CommandInset href
181 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
193 \begin_inset Newline newline
197 \begin_inset Newline newline
201 \begin_inset Note Note
204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
205 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
206 \begin_inset Newline newline
211 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
219 \begin_layout Standard
220 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
221 LatexCommand tableofcontents
228 \begin_layout Chapter
232 \begin_layout Section
233 What is \SpecialChar LyX
237 \begin_layout Standard
239 is a document preparation system.
240 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
241 scripts, publishable books, business
242 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
243 It is unlike most other
244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
251 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
253 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
266 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
269 pt type, left justified, 5
270 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
279 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
283 \begin_layout Standard
284 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
289 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
293 \begin_layout Standard
298 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
299 's philosophy: most importantly,
300 the format of all of the manuals.
301 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
302 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
308 manual describes that, too.
311 \begin_layout Section
316 \begin_layout Standard
317 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
318 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
320 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
321 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
325 \begin_layout Standard
326 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
327 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
328 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
330 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
331 only a vertical scrollbar.
332 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
333 The first case is large images.
334 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
335 image and use the option
346 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
349 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
350 this doesn't work for equations yet.
353 \begin_layout Standard
354 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
355 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
363 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
370 \begin_layout Section
374 \begin_layout Standard
375 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
377 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
379 Just select the manual you want to read from the
386 \begin_layout Section
387 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
389 \begin_inset CommandInset label
391 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
398 \begin_layout Standard
399 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
400 can be configured via the menu
402 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
406 \begin_inset Index idx
409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
416 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
418 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
419 packages are available.
420 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
422 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
424 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
425 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
429 \begin_inset space \space{}
432 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
433 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
435 To force \SpecialChar LyX
436 to re-inspect your system, you should use
438 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
442 \begin_inset Index idx
445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
446 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
452 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
453 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
456 \begin_layout Section
459 \begin_inset CommandInset label
461 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
468 \begin_layout Standard
469 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
470 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
471 installed, but you will not be
472 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
473 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
474 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
475 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
476 document can always be output as plain text
480 \begin_layout Standard
481 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
482 or DocBook classes or packages.
483 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
484 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
487 \begin_layout Standard
488 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
489 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
490 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
493 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
501 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
502 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
505 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
509 \begin_inset Index idx
512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
513 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
521 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
528 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
532 \begin_layout Chapter
533 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
537 \begin_layout Section
538 Basic File Operations
539 \begin_inset Index idx
542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
551 \begin_layout Standard
556 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
557 in addition to some more advanced operations:
560 \begin_layout Itemize
582 \begin_layout Itemize
598 arg "buffer-new-template"
604 \begin_layout Itemize
626 \begin_layout Itemize
634 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
638 \begin_layout Itemize
640 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
652 \begin_layout Itemize
664 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
668 \begin_layout Itemize
670 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
678 \begin_layout Itemize
700 \begin_layout Itemize
712 arg "buffer-write-as"
716 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
720 \begin_layout Itemize
722 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
738 \begin_layout Itemize
752 \begin_layout Itemize
766 \begin_layout Standard
767 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
768 a few minor differences.
771 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
782 command lists the available templates.
783 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
784 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
785 and possibly propose text fragments
787 for the document, features
788 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
791 you would otherwise need to
792 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
794 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
798 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
802 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
810 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
816 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
817 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
821 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
829 \begin_layout Standard
830 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
862 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
863 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
864 is just that — a big, blank space.
872 \begin_layout Standard
893 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
898 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
901 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
919 will reload the document from disk.
920 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
921 and want to restore it to the last save.
930 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
931 them as your changes.
934 \begin_layout Section
935 Basic Editing Features
936 \begin_inset Index idx
939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
946 \begin_inset CommandInset label
948 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
955 \begin_layout Standard
956 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
957 can perform cut and paste operations
958 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
959 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
960 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
961 editing features and how to access
963 We will start with cut and paste.
966 \begin_layout Standard
967 As you might expect, the
971 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
972 various other editing features.
973 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
977 \begin_layout Itemize
983 \begin_inset Index idx
986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1015 \begin_layout Itemize
1021 \begin_inset Index idx
1024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1053 \begin_layout Itemize
1059 \begin_inset Index idx
1062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1087 \begin_layout Itemize
1091 \begin_inset space ~
1097 \begin_layout Itemize
1101 \begin_inset space ~
1107 \begin_layout Itemize
1111 \begin_inset space ~
1115 \begin_inset space ~
1121 \begin_inset Index idx
1124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1133 \begin_inset Index idx
1136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1151 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1161 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1167 \begin_layout Standard
1168 The first three are self-explanatory.
1169 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1170 and other programs by
1191 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1192 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1197 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1198 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1199 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1200 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1201 into individual cells.
1205 \begin_inset space ~
1210 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1211 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1215 \begin_layout Standard
1219 \begin_inset space ~
1224 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1226 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1228 \begin_inset space ~
1235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1241 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1242 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1243 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1245 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1249 \begin_inset space \space{}
1252 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1253 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1256 \begin_inset space ~
1259 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1261 \begin_inset space ~
1265 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1269 \begin_inset space ~
1278 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1279 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1281 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1285 \begin_inset space ~
1290 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1291 start a new paragraph.
1292 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1293 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1298 \begin_inset space ~
1301 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1307 \begin_inset space ~
1315 \begin_inset space ~
1318 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1321 paste from the primary selection.
1322 This is normally the currently selected text.
1325 \begin_layout Standard
1328 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1330 \begin_inset space ~
1334 \begin_inset space ~
1342 \begin_inset space ~
1346 \begin_inset space ~
1352 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1358 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1361 \begin_inset space ~
1370 \begin_inset space ~
1375 button to skip the current word.
1379 \begin_inset space ~
1384 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1388 \begin_inset space ~
1393 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1395 If the toggle is set, searching for
1396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1407 will not match the word
1408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1422 Match whole words only
1424 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1425 to only find complete words, e.
1426 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1438 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1455 offers also an advanced
1458 \begin_inset space ~
1462 \begin_inset space ~
1467 feature that is described in section
1468 \begin_inset space ~
1472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1474 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1481 \begin_layout Standard
1482 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1483 \begin_inset space \space{}
1487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1495 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1497 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1502 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1509 \begin_layout Standard
1513 arg "inset-select-all"
1516 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1517 When the cursor is inside an inset
1520 arg "inset-select-all"
1523 selects the content of the inset.
1527 arg "inset-select-all"
1530 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1535 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1538 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1542 \begin_layout Section
1544 \begin_inset Index idx
1547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1554 \begin_inset Index idx
1557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1564 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1566 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1573 \begin_layout Standard
1574 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1576 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1579 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1582 or the toolbar button
1588 to undo some mistake.
1589 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1591 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1594 or the toolbar button
1601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1608 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1609 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1612 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1615 \begin_layout Standard
1616 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1625 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1626 This is a consequence of the 100
1627 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1630 step undo limit mentioned above.
1633 \begin_layout Standard
1642 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1644 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1648 \begin_layout Section
1650 \begin_inset Index idx
1653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1662 \begin_layout Standard
1663 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1666 \begin_layout Enumerate
1671 \begin_layout Itemize
1676 once anywhere in the edit window.
1677 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1681 \begin_layout Enumerate
1686 \begin_layout Itemize
1693 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1696 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1699 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1700 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1703 \begin_layout Itemize
1704 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1707 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1714 \begin_layout Enumerate
1715 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1719 \begin_layout Standard
1720 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1721 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1725 \begin_layout Section
1727 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1729 name "sec:Navigating"
1734 \begin_inset Index idx
1737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1746 \begin_layout Standard
1748 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1751 \begin_layout Itemize
1756 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1757 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1760 \begin_layout Itemize
1761 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1763 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1765 \begin_inset space ~
1770 or by the toolbar button
1773 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1779 \begin_layout Itemize
1780 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1782 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1785 and use the same menu to return to them.
1786 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1789 \begin_layout Standard
1793 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1798 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1799 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1801 \begin_inset space ~
1806 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1807 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1808 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1809 your last editing position.
1812 \begin_layout Standard
1817 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1821 \begin_layout Subsection
1823 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1825 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1830 \begin_inset Index idx
1833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1834 Navigating ! Outline
1840 \begin_inset Index idx
1843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1852 \begin_layout Standard
1853 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1854 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1855 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1857 \begin_inset space ~
1861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1863 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1867 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1868 \begin_inset space ~
1872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1874 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1879 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1883 \begin_layout Standard
1884 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1885 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1886 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1887 dialog and to modify the citation.
1890 \begin_layout Standard
1895 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1896 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1898 Labels and References
1900 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1909 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1912 \begin_layout Standard
1913 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1914 you further to control the display.
1919 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1920 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1926 option keeps it in the current view state.
1927 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1928 \begin_inset space ~
1931 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1932 \begin_inset space ~
1935 3, the subsections of sections
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1939 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1944 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1945 \begin_inset space ~
1949 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1959 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1962 \begin_layout Standard
1969 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1970 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1984 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1985 So, for example, you can move section
1986 \begin_inset space ~
1990 \begin_inset space ~
1993 2.4 or after section
1994 \begin_inset space ~
1999 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2012 (or the corresponding key bindings
2020 ) you can change the level of sections.
2021 So you can for example make section
2022 \begin_inset space ~
2026 \begin_inset space ~
2030 \begin_inset space ~
2036 \begin_layout Standard
2037 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2038 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2041 \begin_layout Subsection
2042 Horizontal Scrolling
2043 \begin_inset Index idx
2046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2047 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2055 \begin_layout Standard
2057 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
2059 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2063 \begin_inset space \space{}
2067 \begin_inset space ~
2070 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
2071 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
2072 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2076 \begin_layout Standard
2077 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2081 \begin_layout Itemize
2083 is used on a small tablet computer
2086 \begin_layout Itemize
2087 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2099 \begin_inset space ~
2112 \begin_layout Itemize
2113 Math constructs with long command names
2116 \begin_layout Standard
2117 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2118 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2120 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2121 windows so that table
2122 \begin_inset space ~
2126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2128 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2133 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2135 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2136 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2139 \begin_layout Standard
2140 \begin_inset Float table
2147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2148 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2151 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2153 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2157 Horizontal scrolling test.
2165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2167 \begin_inset Tabular
2168 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2169 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2170 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2171 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2172 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2214 \begin_layout Section
2215 Input/Word Completion
2216 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2218 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2223 \begin_inset Index idx
2226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2233 \begin_inset Index idx
2236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2267 \begin_layout Standard
2269 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2271 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2272 is used to propose completions.
2275 \begin_layout Standard
2276 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2279 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2284 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2291 \begin_inset space ~
2295 \begin_inset space ~
2300 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2304 \begin_inset space ~
2309 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2310 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2314 \begin_inset space ~
2320 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2321 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2322 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2323 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2326 \begin_layout Standard
2328 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2329 completions available.
2334 key to accept a proposed completion.
2335 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2336 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2337 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2344 \begin_layout Standard
2345 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2346 ing options for text.
2348 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2350 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2352 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2355 he special math option
2359 enables characters to be composed.
2360 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2361 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2364 , you can then input the characters
2365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2376 to a formula to get it.
2377 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2378 of the math toolbar.
2379 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2383 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2384 's installation folder.
2386 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2387 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2394 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2399 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2400 In the example above,
2405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2437 \begin_layout Section
2439 \begin_inset Index idx
2442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2449 \begin_inset Index idx
2452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2481 \begin_inset Index idx
2484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2515 \begin_layout Standard
2516 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2530 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2533 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2537 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2538 \begin_inset space ~
2542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2544 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2551 \begin_layout Standard
2555 \begin_inset space ~
2563 \begin_inset space ~
2584 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2588 \begin_layout Labeling
2589 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2593 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2594 LatexCommand nomenclature
2596 description "Tabulator key"
2603 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2605 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2606 \begin_inset space ~
2610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2612 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2617 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2619 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2623 , especially section
2624 \begin_inset space ~
2628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2630 reference "subsec:Lists"
2636 If you are still confused, look in the
2641 \begin_inset Newline newline
2649 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2650 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2654 \begin_layout Labeling
2655 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2659 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2660 LatexCommand nomenclature
2662 description "Escape key"
2670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2677 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2678 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2681 \begin_layout Labeling
2682 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2688 \begin_inset space ~
2692 \begin_inset space ~
2699 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2700 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2704 \begin_layout Standard
2705 There are three modifier keys:
2708 \begin_layout Labeling
2709 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2727 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2728 LatexCommand nomenclature
2730 description "Control key"
2735 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2736 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2740 \begin_layout Itemize
2749 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2752 \begin_layout Itemize
2761 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2764 \begin_layout Itemize
2773 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2777 \begin_layout Labeling
2778 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2796 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2797 LatexCommand nomenclature
2799 description "Shift key"
2804 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2805 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2808 \begin_layout Labeling
2809 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2827 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2828 LatexCommand nomenclature
2830 description "Alt or Meta key"
2835 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2836 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2837 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2843 \begin_inset Newline newline
2846 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2848 menu accelerator keys
2851 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2852 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2856 \begin_layout Standard
2857 For example, the sequence
2858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2864 \begin_inset space ~
2868 \begin_inset space ~
2874 \begin_inset space ~
2882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2901 \begin_inset space ~
2907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2917 \begin_layout Standard
2922 manual lists all other things bound to the
2930 \begin_layout Standard
2931 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2933 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2934 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2935 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2936 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2937 The \SpecialChar LyX
2938 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2939 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2940 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2942 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2958 followed by a capital
2965 \begin_layout Chapter
2968 \begin_inset Index idx
2971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2981 \begin_layout Section
2983 \begin_inset Index idx
2986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2995 \begin_layout Subsection
2999 \begin_layout Standard
3000 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3001 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3002 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3003 numbering schemes, and so on.
3004 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3005 and format the title of your document differently.
3008 \begin_layout Standard
3013 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3014 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3015 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3016 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3017 picks one for you by default.
3018 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3021 \begin_layout Subsection
3023 \begin_inset Index idx
3026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3033 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3035 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3042 \begin_layout Standard
3043 You can select a class using the
3045 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3046 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3050 \begin_inset Index idx
3053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3060 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3064 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3068 \begin_layout Standard
3069 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3074 \begin_layout Description
3075 Article for basic articles
3078 \begin_layout Description
3079 Report for basic reports
3082 \begin_layout Description
3083 Book for writing a book
3086 \begin_layout Description
3087 Letter for US-style letters
3090 \begin_layout Standard
3091 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3092 only uses if you have installed
3093 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3094 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3095 distributions will include
3097 Here are some of the classes.
3098 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3100 Special Document Classes
3109 \begin_layout Description
3110 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3113 \begin_layout Description
3114 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3118 \begin_layout Description
3119 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3123 \begin_layout Description
3124 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3125 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3126 There are three article layouts available.
3127 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3128 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3129 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3130 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3135 sequential numbering
3136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3139 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3140 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3141 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3142 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3145 \begin_layout Description
3146 Beamer Layout for presentations
3149 \begin_layout Description
3150 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3151 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3152 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3153 with \SpecialChar LyX
3157 \begin_layout Description
3158 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3161 \begin_layout Description
3163 \begin_inset space ~
3166 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3169 \begin_layout Description
3170 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3173 \begin_layout Description
3174 Foils Used to make transparencies
3177 \begin_layout Description
3178 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3179 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3180 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3181 with \SpecialChar LyX
3185 \begin_layout Description
3186 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3187 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3190 \begin_layout Description
3191 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3194 \begin_layout Description
3195 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3198 \begin_layout Description
3199 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3200 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3201 (Is used by this document.)
3204 \begin_layout Description
3205 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3208 \begin_layout Description
3209 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3212 \begin_layout Description
3217 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3218 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3220 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3224 \begin_layout Description
3225 Slides Used to make transparencies
3228 \begin_layout Description
3230 \begin_inset space ~
3233 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3234 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3237 \begin_layout Description
3238 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3241 \begin_layout Standard
3242 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3244 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3246 Special Document Classes
3253 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3254 of the document classes.
3257 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3261 \begin_layout Standard
3262 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3264 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3265 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3267 \begin_inset Index idx
3270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3287 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3288 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3290 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3293 \begin_layout Standard
3296 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3301 , are highly specialized.
3303 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3304 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3305 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3306 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3307 by some document class.
3308 There are just too many of them.
3309 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3312 \begin_layout Standard
3313 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3321 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3322 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3323 document class for a new file.
3325 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3328 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3335 manual for information on how to install them.
3336 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3342 \begin_layout Standard
3343 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3344 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3345 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3346 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3347 class files to be used for dissertation
3348 s submitted to those universities.
3349 The \SpecialChar LyX
3350 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3352 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3356 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3362 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3365 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3367 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3369 name "subsec:Modules"
3374 \begin_inset Index idx
3377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3386 \begin_layout Standard
3387 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3388 chosen document class.
3389 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3390 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3397 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3401 \begin_inset Index idx
3404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3411 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3415 \begin_layout Standard
3416 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3417 packages or file format converters that are not always
3418 installed by default.
3420 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3421 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3422 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3423 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3425 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3426 file without the missing prerequisites.
3427 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3428 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3431 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3435 \begin_inset Index idx
3438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3439 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3445 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3450 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3453 \begin_layout Standard
3454 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3462 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3464 will advise you about these things.
3472 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3474 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3476 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3481 \begin_inset Index idx
3484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3485 Document ! Local Layout
3493 \begin_layout Standard
3494 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3495 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3496 : They are intended to be used in
3497 a variety of different documents.
3498 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3499 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3500 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3501 need a specific inset or
3502 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3504 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757388
3507 style only that one time.
3508 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3510 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3528 manual for information on how to use it.
3531 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3535 \begin_layout Standard
3536 Each class has a default set of options.
3537 Here's a quick table describing them:
3540 \begin_layout Standard
3541 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3547 \begin_layout Standard
3549 \begin_inset Tabular
3550 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3551 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3552 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3553 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3554 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3555 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3556 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4010 \begin_layout Standard
4011 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4017 \begin_layout Standard
4018 You're probably also wondering what
4019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4023 \begin_inset space ~
4027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4031 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4032 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4037 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4042 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4052 headings, there are also
4060 headings, and so on.
4061 We will describe these headings fully in section
4062 \begin_inset space ~
4066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4068 reference "subsec:Headings"
4075 \begin_layout Subsection
4077 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4079 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4084 \begin_inset Index idx
4087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4094 \begin_inset Index idx
4097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4106 \begin_layout Standard
4107 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4109 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4116 \begin_inset space ~
4124 \begin_inset space ~
4129 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4131 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4132 doesn't support special options you want to
4133 use for your document.
4134 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4135 -class and its options, you have to read
4139 \begin_layout Standard
4143 \begin_inset space ~
4150 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4156 \begin_inset space ~
4161 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4162 You can choose between the following five options:
4165 \begin_layout Labeling
4166 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4171 Use default page style of current class.
4174 \begin_layout Labeling
4175 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4180 No page numbers or headings.
4183 \begin_layout Labeling
4184 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4192 \begin_layout Labeling
4193 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4198 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4199 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4200 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4201 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4204 \begin_layout Labeling
4205 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4210 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4211 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4217 \begin_inset Index idx
4220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4228 How they are defined is explained in section
4229 \begin_inset space ~
4233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4235 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4242 \begin_layout Standard
4243 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4244 \begin_inset space ~
4248 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4250 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4257 \begin_layout Subsection
4258 Paper Size and Orientation
4259 \begin_inset Index idx
4262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4263 Document ! Paper size
4269 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4271 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4278 \begin_layout Standard
4279 You can find the following options in the menu
4282 \begin_inset space ~
4289 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4293 \begin_inset Index idx
4296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4305 \begin_layout Labeling
4306 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4310 \begin_inset space ~
4315 What size paper to print on.
4320 \begin_layout Itemize
4326 \begin_layout Itemize
4332 \begin_layout Itemize
4338 \begin_layout Itemize
4344 \begin_layout Itemize
4347 US letter, US legal, US executive
4350 \begin_layout Itemize
4356 \begin_layout Itemize
4363 \begin_layout Labeling
4364 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4369 To choose whether to output as
4380 \begin_layout Labeling
4381 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4385 \begin_inset space ~
4390 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4391 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4394 \begin_layout Subsection
4396 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4398 name "subsec:Margins"
4403 \begin_inset Index idx
4406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4413 \begin_inset Index idx
4416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4425 \begin_layout Standard
4426 Paper margins are set in the menu
4428 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4432 \begin_inset Index idx
4435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4444 \begin_layout Standard
4445 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4446 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4447 the paper format and the font size into account.
4450 \begin_layout Subsection
4454 \begin_layout Standard
4455 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4461 That includes the paragraph environments.
4462 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4463 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4464 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4466 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4475 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4477 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4478 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4479 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4482 \begin_layout Section
4483 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4484 \begin_inset Index idx
4487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4488 Paragraph ! Indentation
4496 \begin_layout Subsection
4498 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4500 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4507 \begin_layout Standard
4508 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4509 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4512 \begin_layout Standard
4513 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4514 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4515 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4516 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4520 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4526 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4527 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4528 language than English.
4530 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4533 \begin_layout Standard
4534 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4535 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4536 into \SpecialChar LyX
4538 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4541 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4543 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4544 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4545 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4552 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4553 goes to produce a printable file.
4558 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4560 gives you the ability globally to change
4564 these pre-coded spacings.
4565 We will explain more later.
4568 \begin_layout Subsection
4569 Paragraph Separation
4570 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4572 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4577 \begin_inset Index idx
4580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4581 Paragraph ! Separation
4589 \begin_layout Standard
4597 \begin_inset space ~
4605 \begin_inset space ~
4612 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4616 \begin_inset Index idx
4619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4625 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4628 \begin_layout Subsection
4632 \begin_layout Standard
4633 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4636 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4638 \begin_inset space ~
4643 dialog and toggle the
4646 \begin_inset space ~
4651 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4654 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4658 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4659 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4663 \begin_layout Standard
4664 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4665 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4668 \begin_layout Subsection
4670 \begin_inset Index idx
4673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4674 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4682 \begin_layout Standard
4685 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4689 \begin_inset Index idx
4692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4701 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4705 \begin_inset space ~
4714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4715 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4721 \begin_inset Index idx
4724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4731 installed to use this feature.
4736 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4738 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4740 \begin_inset space ~
4745 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4746 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4749 \begin_layout Section
4750 Paragraph Environments
4751 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4753 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4758 \begin_inset Index idx
4761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4762 Paragraph ! Environments
4768 \begin_inset Index idx
4771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4772 Paragraph environments|(
4780 \begin_layout Subsection
4784 \begin_layout Standard
4785 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4788 \begin_layout Standard
4797 } \SpecialChar ldots
4807 \begin_inset Newline newline
4810 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4812 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4813 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4814 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4823 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4826 \begin_layout Standard
4827 A paragraph environment is simply a
4828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4835 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4836 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4837 scheme, labels, and so on.
4838 Additionally, you can
4839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4846 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4847 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4848 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4849 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4851 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4853 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4856 \begin_layout Standard
4857 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4858 \begin_inset Graphics
4859 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4865 at the left end of the toolbar.
4867 will change the environment of the
4871 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4872 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4873 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4877 \begin_layout Standard
4886 create a new paragraph using the
4890 paragraph environment.
4892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4899 because if you are in one of these environments:
4902 \begin_layout Itemize
4908 \begin_layout Itemize
4914 \begin_layout Itemize
4920 \begin_layout Itemize
4926 \begin_layout Itemize
4932 \begin_layout Itemize
4938 \begin_layout Itemize
4944 \begin_layout Standard
4946 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4950 , rather than resetting it to
4955 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4956 \begin_inset space ~
4960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4962 reference "sec:Nesting"
4969 \begin_layout Subsection
4973 \begin_layout Standard
4974 The default paragraph environment is
4979 It creates a plain paragraph.
4981 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4982 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4983 this manual) are in the
4990 \begin_layout Standard
4991 You can nest a paragraph using the
4995 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5003 \begin_layout Subsection
5005 \begin_inset Index idx
5008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5017 \begin_layout Standard
5018 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5019 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5028 for thanks or contact information.
5029 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5030 places all of this on a separate page
5031 along with today's date.
5032 For other types of documents, the title
5033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5040 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5044 \begin_layout Standard
5046 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5060 Here's how you use them:
5063 \begin_layout Itemize
5064 Put the title of your document in the
5071 \begin_layout Itemize
5072 Put the author name in the
5079 \begin_layout Itemize
5080 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5081 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5087 Note that using this environment is optional.
5088 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5089 will automatically insert today's date.
5090 If you don't want a date, use the option
5092 Suppress default date on front page
5096 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5097 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5099 \begin_inset space ~
5107 \begin_layout Standard
5108 You can use footnotes to insert
5109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5116 or contact information.
5119 \begin_layout Subsection
5121 \begin_inset Index idx
5124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5131 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5133 name "subsec:Headings"
5140 \begin_layout Standard
5141 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5143 takes care of the numbering for you.
5146 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5148 \begin_inset Index idx
5151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5152 Section headings ! Numbered
5160 \begin_layout Standard
5161 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5165 \begin_layout Enumerate
5171 \begin_layout Enumerate
5177 \begin_layout Enumerate
5183 \begin_layout Enumerate
5189 \begin_layout Enumerate
5195 \begin_layout Enumerate
5201 \begin_layout Enumerate
5207 \begin_layout Standard
5209 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5210 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5211 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5214 \begin_layout Standard
5215 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5216 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5217 You group the book into chapters.
5219 does a similar grouping:
5222 \begin_layout Itemize
5227 is divided into either
5238 \begin_layout Itemize
5250 \begin_layout Itemize
5262 \begin_layout Itemize
5274 \begin_layout Itemize
5286 \begin_layout Itemize
5298 \begin_layout Standard
5299 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5307 Not all document types use the
5311 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5316 is the top-level heading.
5324 \begin_layout Standard
5329 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5330 labels it with its number,
5331 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5333 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5345 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5347 \begin_inset Index idx
5350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5351 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5359 \begin_layout Standard
5360 The unnumbered section headings have a
5361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5368 at the end of their name.
5369 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5370 the table of contents, see section
5371 \begin_inset space ~
5375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5384 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5385 Changing the Numbering
5386 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5388 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5395 \begin_layout Standard
5396 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5397 in the Table of Contents.
5398 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5400 Just as certain classes start with
5414 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5424 This is something you can change.
5427 \begin_layout Standard
5430 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5434 \begin_inset Index idx
5437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5446 \begin_inset space ~
5450 \begin_inset space ~
5455 you will see two counters.
5460 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5461 numbers a section heading.
5462 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5466 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5467 Short Titles of Headings
5468 \begin_inset Index idx
5471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5472 Section headings ! Short titles
5478 \begin_inset Argument 1
5481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5488 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5490 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5497 \begin_layout Standard
5498 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5499 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5500 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5501 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5504 \begin_layout Standard
5506 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5507 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5508 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5509 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5512 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5514 \begin_inset space ~
5520 This will insert a box labeled
5521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5525 \begin_inset space ~
5529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5532 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5533 This also works for captions inside floats.
5534 There can only be one short title per title.
5537 \begin_layout Standard
5538 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5541 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5545 \begin_layout Standard
5546 The following information applies to all section headings:
5549 \begin_layout Itemize
5550 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5553 \begin_layout Itemize
5554 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5557 \begin_layout Itemize
5558 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5561 \begin_layout Itemize
5562 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5565 \begin_layout Subsection
5569 \begin_layout Standard
5571 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5585 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5586 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5587 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5588 the text they contain.
5589 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5597 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5600 \begin_layout Standard
5601 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5610 when you start a new paragraph.
5611 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5615 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5616 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5617 have to change back to the
5621 environment yourself.
5624 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5633 \begin_inset Index idx
5636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5645 \begin_layout Standard
5646 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5647 time for the differences.
5656 are identical except for one difference:
5660 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5669 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5672 \begin_layout Standard
5673 Here's an example of the
5686 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5688 See – no indentation!
5692 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5693 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5694 the other paragraph.
5697 \begin_layout Standard
5698 Here's another example, this time in the
5705 \begin_layout Quotation
5711 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5712 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5713 the first line, then
5717 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5721 you were quoting other text.
5724 \begin_layout Quotation
5725 Here's a new paragraph.
5726 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5727 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5730 \begin_layout Standard
5731 As the examples show,
5735 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5736 They should put quotes in the
5741 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5745 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5748 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5750 \begin_inset Index idx
5753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5760 \begin_inset Index idx
5763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5770 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5779 \begin_layout Standard
5784 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5790 \begin_inset Newline newline
5793 Which I did not rehearse!
5797 It could be much worse.
5798 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5800 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5801 indented a bit more than the first.
5802 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5808 \begin_inset Newline newline
5811 And make things look fine
5812 \begin_inset Newline newline
5818 arg "newline-insert newline"
5824 \begin_layout Standard
5829 does not indent both margins.
5830 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5831 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5834 arg "newline-insert newline"
5840 \begin_layout Subsection
5842 \begin_inset Index idx
5845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5852 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5861 \begin_layout Standard
5863 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5873 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5874 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5883 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5884 lets you provide your own label.
5885 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5886 describing some general features of all four of them.
5889 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5893 \begin_layout Standard
5894 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5896 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5897 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5906 reset the environment to
5910 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5911 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5912 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5916 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5920 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5927 \begin_layout Standard
5928 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5929 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5930 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5932 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5933 you read all of section
5934 \begin_inset space ~
5938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5940 reference "sec:Nesting"
5947 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5949 \begin_inset Index idx
5952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5959 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5968 \begin_layout Standard
5969 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5973 paragraph environment.
5974 It has the following properties:
5977 \begin_layout Itemize
5978 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5982 \begin_layout Itemize
5984 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5987 \begin_layout Itemize
5988 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5992 \begin_layout Itemize
5993 The items can have any length.
5995 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5996 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6003 \begin_layout Itemize
6008 environment inside another
6012 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6016 \begin_layout Itemize
6017 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6020 \begin_layout Itemize
6022 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6025 \begin_layout Itemize
6027 \begin_inset space ~
6031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6033 reference "sec:Nesting"
6037 for a full explanation of nesting.
6041 \begin_layout Standard
6042 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6051 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6054 \begin_layout Standard
6055 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6056 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6059 \begin_layout Itemize
6060 The label for the first level
6064 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6068 \begin_layout Itemize
6069 The label for the second level is a dash.
6073 \begin_layout Itemize
6074 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6078 \begin_layout Itemize
6079 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6083 \begin_layout Itemize
6084 Back out to the third level.
6088 \begin_layout Itemize
6089 Back to the second level.
6093 \begin_layout Itemize
6094 Back to the outermost level.
6097 \begin_layout Standard
6098 These are the default labels for an
6103 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6105 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6108 dialog in the submenu
6113 \begin_inset Index idx
6116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6122 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6126 \begin_layout Standard
6127 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6128 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6130 \begin_inset space ~
6134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6136 reference "sec:Nesting"
6143 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6145 \begin_inset Index idx
6148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6155 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6157 name "sec:Enumerate"
6164 \begin_layout Standard
6169 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6170 It has these properties:
6173 \begin_layout Enumerate
6174 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6178 \begin_layout Enumerate
6179 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6183 \begin_layout Enumerate
6185 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6188 \begin_layout Enumerate
6193 environment resets the counter to one.
6196 \begin_layout Enumerate
6209 \begin_layout Enumerate
6210 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6211 Items can have any length.
6214 \begin_layout Enumerate
6215 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6218 \begin_layout Enumerate
6219 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6222 \begin_layout Enumerate
6223 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6227 \begin_layout Standard
6236 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6238 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6239 labels the four different levels in an
6246 \begin_layout Enumerate
6247 The first level of an
6251 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6255 \begin_layout Enumerate
6256 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6260 \begin_layout Enumerate
6261 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6265 \begin_layout Enumerate
6266 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6269 \begin_layout Enumerate
6270 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6275 \begin_layout Enumerate
6276 Back to the third level
6280 \begin_layout Enumerate
6281 Back to the second level.
6285 \begin_layout Enumerate
6286 Back to the outermost level.
6289 \begin_layout Standard
6290 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6294 environment, see section
6295 \begin_inset space ~
6299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6301 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6306 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6310 \begin_layout Standard
6311 There is more to nesting
6315 environments than we've stated here.
6316 You should read section
6317 \begin_inset space ~
6321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6323 reference "sec:Nesting"
6327 to learn more about nesting.
6330 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6332 \begin_inset Index idx
6335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6344 \begin_layout Standard
6345 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6349 list has no fixed label.
6350 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6359 of the first line as the label.
6363 \begin_layout Description
6364 Example: This is an example of the
6371 \begin_layout Standard
6373 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6377 \begin_layout Standard
6379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6386 it is meant that the first usage of the
6390 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6392 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6400 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6405 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6406 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6408 \begin_inset space ~
6414 \begin_inset space ~
6418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6420 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6424 for more information.) Here is an example:
6427 \begin_layout Description
6429 \begin_inset space ~
6432 Example: This one shows how to use a
6435 \begin_inset space ~
6447 \begin_layout Description
6448 Usage: You should use the
6452 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6453 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6455 It's not a good idea to use a
6459 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6460 You're better off using
6472 paragraphs into them.
6475 \begin_layout Description
6476 Nesting: You can nest
6480 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6484 \begin_layout Standard
6485 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6486 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6487 them from the first line.
6490 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6492 \begin_inset Index idx
6495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6504 \begin_layout Standard
6509 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6510 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6514 \begin_layout Standard
6523 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6525 Here are its properties:
6528 \begin_layout Labeling
6529 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6531 \begin_inset space ~
6534 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6543 of each line as the item label.
6548 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6549 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6550 space as described above.
6553 \begin_layout Labeling
6554 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6555 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6556 uses different margins for the item label and the
6557 body of the item text.
6558 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6559 label width plus a little extra space.
6563 \begin_layout Labeling
6564 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6566 \begin_inset space ~
6569 width \SpecialChar LyX
6570 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6571 If the label width is larger, the label
6572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6579 into the first line.
6580 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6581 margin of the rest of the item text.
6584 \begin_layout Labeling
6585 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6587 \begin_inset space ~
6590 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6595 environment has the same left margin.
6596 \begin_inset Newline newline
6599 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6602 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6604 \begin_inset space ~
6609 dialog (toolbar button
6612 arg "layout-paragraph"
6619 \begin_inset space ~
6624 determines the default label width.
6625 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6634 multiple times instead.
6635 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6645 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6648 \begin_inset space ~
6653 every time you alter a label in a
6658 \begin_inset Newline newline
6661 The predefined default width is the length of
6662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6670 \begin_inset space ~
6676 \begin_layout Standard
6681 list the same way as the
6685 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6691 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6695 \begin_layout Standard
6700 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6701 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6703 \begin_inset space ~
6707 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6709 reference "sec:Nesting"
6713 to learn about nesting.
6716 \begin_layout Standard
6717 There is yet another feature of the
6721 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6722 left-justifies the item labels by
6724 You can use additional
6728 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6729 justifies the item label.
6734 are documented in section
6735 \begin_inset space ~
6739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6741 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6746 Here are some examples:
6749 \begin_layout Labeling
6750 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6751 Left The default for
6758 \begin_layout Labeling
6759 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6760 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6767 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6770 \begin_layout Labeling
6771 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6772 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6776 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6783 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6786 \begin_layout Subsection
6788 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6790 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6795 \begin_inset Index idx
6798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6807 \begin_layout Standard
6808 The features described in this section require that the module
6810 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6812 is loaded in the document settings.
6813 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6819 \begin_inset Index idx
6822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6832 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6833 Custom Enumerate Lists
6834 \begin_inset Index idx
6837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6838 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6846 \begin_layout Standard
6848 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6851 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6854 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6855 There you add the command
6858 \begin_layout Standard
6866 \begin_layout Standard
6878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6879 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6880 Code, look at section
6881 \begin_inset space ~
6885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6887 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6900 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6907 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6908 For capital Roman numerals replace
6920 in the command above.
6921 For Arabic numerals use
6929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6936 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6951 \begin_layout Standard
6953 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6961 You can only number 26
6962 \begin_inset space ~
6965 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6973 \begin_layout Standard
6974 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6975 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6978 \begin_layout Standard
6979 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6982 \begin_layout Enumerate
6983 \begin_inset Argument 1
6986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7012 \begin_layout Enumerate
7013 \begin_inset Argument 1
7016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7039 \begin_layout Enumerate
7044 \begin_layout Enumerate
7045 \begin_inset Argument 1
7048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7072 \begin_layout Enumerate
7073 \begin_inset Argument 1
7076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7102 \begin_layout Standard
7103 For this list these commands were used:
7106 \begin_layout Standard
7117 \begin_inset Newline newline
7125 \begin_inset Newline newline
7133 \begin_inset Newline newline
7143 \begin_layout Standard
7150 makes the label emphasized and
7159 \begin_layout Standard
7160 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7168 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7169 lists until you change the definition.
7177 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7179 \begin_inset Index idx
7182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7183 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7191 \begin_layout Standard
7192 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7195 \begin_layout Enumerate
7196 \begin_inset Argument 1
7199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7218 \begin_inset Note Note
7221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7222 goes back to default numbering
7230 \begin_layout Enumerate
7234 \begin_layout Standard
7238 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7242 \begin_layout Standard
7243 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7248 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7249 to indicate that it is a resumed
7250 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7251 , but in the output.
7254 \begin_layout Standard
7255 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7263 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7272 \begin_layout Standard
7273 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7275 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7276 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7277 of a normal enumeration.
7278 There, insert the command
7281 \begin_layout Standard
7287 \begin_layout Standard
7292 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7296 \begin_layout Enumerate
7300 \begin_layout Enumerate
7304 \begin_layout Standard
7305 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7308 \begin_layout Enumerate
7309 \begin_inset Argument 1
7312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7328 This enumeration starts at 4
7331 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7333 \begin_inset Index idx
7336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7345 \begin_layout Standard
7346 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7348 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7351 \begin_layout Itemize
7355 \begin_layout Itemize
7356 with standard spacing
7359 \begin_layout Standard
7360 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7362 Add there the command
7366 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7369 \begin_layout Itemize
7370 \begin_inset Argument 1
7373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7392 \begin_layout Itemize
7396 \begin_layout Itemize
7400 \begin_layout Standard
7401 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7408 \begin_inset Index idx
7411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7419 For more information see its documentation,
7420 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7430 \begin_layout Standard
7431 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7433 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7434 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7435 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7438 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7441 \begin_layout Enumerate
7442 \begin_inset Argument 1
7445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7453 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7466 \begin_layout Enumerate
7467 with negative indentation
7470 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7471 Further Customization
7472 \begin_inset Index idx
7475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7476 Lists ! Customization
7484 \begin_layout Standard
7485 You can also change the style of description lists.
7489 \begin_layout Standard
7495 \begin_layout Standard
7496 changes the description label font, the command
7499 \begin_layout Standard
7505 \begin_layout Standard
7506 sets the list style.
7509 \begin_layout Standard
7510 An example where the command
7513 \begin_layout Standard
7518 itshape, style=nextline
7521 \begin_layout Standard
7525 \begin_layout Description
7527 \begin_inset space ~
7531 \begin_inset Argument 1
7534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7540 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7542 itshape, style=nextline
7552 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7553 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7557 \begin_layout Description
7559 \begin_inset space ~
7562 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7563 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7564 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7567 \begin_layout Standard
7568 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7574 \begin_inset Index idx
7577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7585 For more information see its documentation
7586 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7596 \begin_layout Subsection
7598 \begin_inset Index idx
7601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7610 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7612 \begin_inset space ~
7615 Address: An Overview
7618 \begin_layout Standard
7619 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7620 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7628 \begin_inset space ~
7634 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7635 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7636 gags on the document.
7637 In contrast, you can use the
7644 \begin_inset space ~
7649 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7650 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7654 \begin_layout Standard
7655 Of course, you're not limited to using
7662 \begin_inset space ~
7671 \begin_inset space ~
7676 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7677 some European academic papers.
7680 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7682 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7684 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7691 \begin_layout Standard
7696 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7697 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7701 \begin_inset space ~
7706 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7707 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7708 Here's an example of each:
7711 \begin_layout Right Address
7713 \begin_inset Newline newline
7717 \begin_inset Newline newline
7721 \begin_inset Newline newline
7724 When is it? What is today?
7727 \begin_layout Standard
7731 \begin_inset space ~
7737 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7739 the largest block of text on a single line.
7740 Here's an example of the
7747 \begin_layout Address
7749 \begin_inset Newline newline
7752 Where do I send this
7753 \begin_inset Newline newline
7756 Your post office and country
7759 \begin_layout Standard
7760 As you can see, both
7767 \begin_inset space ~
7772 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7777 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7778 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7784 This makes sense, since
7792 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7793 Thus, you have to use
7800 arg "newline-insert newline"
7805 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7806 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7808 \begin_inset space ~
7812 \begin_inset space ~
7817 ) to start a new line in an
7824 \begin_inset space ~
7832 \begin_layout Subsection
7836 \begin_layout Standard
7837 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7838 or list of references.
7840 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7843 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7845 \begin_inset Index idx
7848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7857 \begin_layout Standard
7862 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7863 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7864 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7865 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7879 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7880 The book document classes ignores the
7884 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7888 in a letter document class.
7891 \begin_layout Standard
7896 environment does several things for you.
7897 First, it puts the centered label
7898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7906 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7908 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7909 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7910 the subsequent text.
7911 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7913 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7917 \begin_layout Standard
7918 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7922 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7923 The new paragraph will still be in the
7928 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7929 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7932 \begin_layout Standard
7933 \begin_inset Float figure
7940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7942 \begin_inset Graphics
7943 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7951 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7954 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7956 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7977 \begin_layout Standard
7978 We would love to demonstrate the
7982 environment, but since this document is in the
7983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7990 class, we can't do this.
7991 We inserted it therefore as figure
7992 \begin_inset space ~
7996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7998 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8003 If you have never heard of an
8004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8011 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8014 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8016 \begin_inset Index idx
8019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8026 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8028 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8035 \begin_layout Standard
8040 environment is used to list references.
8041 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8042 only use it at the end of the document.
8054 \begin_layout Standard
8055 When you first open a
8059 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8060 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8076 depending on the document class.
8077 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8078 Each paragraph of the
8082 environment is a bibliography entry.
8087 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8088 Each new paragraph is still in the
8095 \begin_layout Standard
8096 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8097 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8099 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8101 handling, have a look at section
8102 \begin_inset space ~
8106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8108 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8115 \begin_layout Subsection
8116 Special Environments
8119 \begin_layout Standard
8121 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8122 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8125 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8130 \begin_inset Index idx
8133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8141 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8143 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8150 \begin_layout Standard
8156 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8158 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8163 key as a fixed whitespace.
8167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8180 \begin_inset space ~
8185 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8203 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8206 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8209 arg "newline-insert newline"
8226 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8227 So, when you finish using the
8232 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8233 Also, you can nest the
8238 environment inside of others.
8241 \begin_layout Standard
8242 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8245 \begin_layout Itemize
8249 arg "newline-insert newline"
8252 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8257 \begin_inset space \space{}
8267 arg "newline-insert newline"
8273 \begin_layout Itemize
8277 arg "newline-insert newline"
8287 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8293 \begin_layout Itemize
8294 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8295 You must put at least one
8299 in any line you want blank.
8300 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8304 \begin_layout Itemize
8305 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8309 since that will insert
8314 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8317 arg "self-insert \""
8323 \begin_layout Standard
8327 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8331 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8335 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8339 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8343 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8344 printf("Hello World!
8349 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8353 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8357 \begin_layout Standard
8358 This is just the standard
8359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8370 \begin_layout Standard
8376 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8378 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8379 as if you used a typewriter.
8380 \begin_inset Index idx
8383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8384 Paragraph environments|)
8389 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8392 Program Code Listings
8397 \begin_inset space ~
8405 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8409 \begin_inset Index idx
8412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8421 \begin_layout Standard
8426 environment is similar to the
8431 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8432 computer console text.
8437 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8451 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8452 you can have empty lines.
8465 \begin_layout Itemize
8466 have a certain language and a text style
8469 \begin_layout Itemize
8470 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8471 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8472 and \SpecialChar TeX
8476 \begin_layout Standard
8477 Because of these properties
8481 works like a typewriter.
8485 \begin_layout Verbatim
8490 \begin_layout Verbatim
8494 The following 2 lines are empty:
8497 \begin_layout Verbatim
8501 \begin_layout Verbatim
8505 \begin_layout Verbatim
8507 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8512 \begin_layout Standard
8517 environment is identical to
8521 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8522 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8529 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8534 \begin_layout Section
8535 Nesting Environments
8536 \begin_inset Index idx
8539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8540 Nesting ! Environments
8546 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8555 \begin_layout Subsection
8559 \begin_layout Standard
8561 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8563 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8565 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8567 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8579 \begin_layout Enumerate
8583 \begin_layout Enumerate
8588 \begin_layout Enumerate
8592 \begin_layout Enumerate
8597 \begin_layout Enumerate
8601 \begin_layout Standard
8602 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8603 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8605 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8607 \begin_inset space ~
8611 \begin_inset space ~
8619 \begin_inset space ~
8623 \begin_inset space ~
8628 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8630 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8633 arg "depth-increment"
8639 arg "depth-decrement"
8653 arg "depth-increment"
8659 arg "depth-decrement"
8663 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8664 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8668 \begin_layout Standard
8669 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8670 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8671 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8672 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8673 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8676 \begin_layout Standard
8677 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8679 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8681 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8684 \begin_layout Subsection
8685 What You Can and Can't Nest
8688 \begin_layout Standard
8689 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8690 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8693 \begin_layout Standard
8694 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8695 than a simple yes or no.
8696 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8699 \begin_layout Itemize
8700 Completely unnestable
8703 \begin_layout Itemize
8704 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8708 \begin_layout Itemize
8709 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8713 \begin_layout Standard
8714 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8715 environments have them:
8718 \begin_layout Description
8719 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8720 Can't nest into them.
8724 \begin_layout Itemize
8730 \begin_layout Itemize
8736 \begin_layout Itemize
8742 \begin_layout Itemize
8748 \begin_layout Itemize
8755 \begin_layout Description
8757 \begin_inset space ~
8760 Nestable You can nest them.
8761 You can nest other things into them.
8765 \begin_layout Itemize
8771 \begin_layout Itemize
8777 \begin_layout Itemize
8783 \begin_layout Itemize
8789 \begin_layout Itemize
8795 \begin_layout Itemize
8801 \begin_layout Itemize
8807 \begin_layout Itemize
8814 \begin_layout Itemize
8820 \begin_layout Itemize
8827 \begin_layout Description
8828 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8829 You can't nest anything into them.
8833 \begin_layout Itemize
8839 \begin_layout Itemize
8845 \begin_layout Itemize
8851 \begin_layout Itemize
8857 \begin_layout Itemize
8863 \begin_layout Itemize
8869 \begin_layout Itemize
8875 \begin_layout Itemize
8881 \begin_layout Itemize
8887 \begin_layout Itemize
8893 \begin_layout Itemize
8899 \begin_layout Itemize
8905 \begin_layout Itemize
8911 \begin_layout Itemize
8915 \begin_inset space ~
8921 \begin_layout Itemize
8928 \begin_layout Standard
8929 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8937 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8947 \begin_inset space ~
8950 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8951 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8952 nested section headings violate this.
8960 \begin_layout Subsection
8961 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8962 \begin_inset Index idx
8965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8966 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8974 \begin_layout Standard
8975 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8976 affected by nesting anyhow.
8980 \begin_layout Itemize
8984 \begin_layout Itemize
8988 \begin_layout Itemize
8992 \begin_layout Standard
8994 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9002 Figures and tables in
9006 are not affected by this.
9011 Have a look at section
9012 \begin_inset space ~
9016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9018 reference "sec:Floats"
9022 for more information about
9029 \begin_layout Standard
9031 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9032 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9036 \begin_layout Standard
9037 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9045 of its own, it behaves just like a
9046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9053 paragraph environment.
9054 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9058 \begin_layout Standard
9059 Here's an example with a table:
9062 \begin_layout Enumerate
9067 \begin_layout Enumerate
9068 This is (a) and it's nested.
9072 \begin_layout Standard
9073 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9079 \begin_layout Standard
9081 \begin_inset Tabular
9082 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9083 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9169 \begin_layout Standard
9170 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9177 \begin_layout Enumerate
9179 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9183 \begin_layout Enumerate
9187 \begin_layout Standard
9188 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9191 \begin_layout Enumerate
9196 \begin_layout Enumerate
9197 This is (a) and it's nested.
9201 \begin_layout Standard
9202 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9208 \begin_layout Standard
9210 \begin_inset Tabular
9211 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9212 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9213 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9214 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9298 \begin_layout Standard
9299 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9305 \begin_layout Enumerate
9312 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9315 \begin_layout Enumerate
9319 \begin_layout Standard
9320 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9324 \begin_layout Standard
9325 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9328 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9331 \begin_layout Enumerate
9336 \begin_layout Enumerate
9337 This is (a) and it's nested.
9340 \begin_layout Standard
9341 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9347 \begin_layout Standard
9349 \begin_inset Tabular
9350 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9351 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9352 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9353 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9438 \begin_layout Standard
9439 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9445 \begin_layout Enumerate
9447 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9454 \begin_layout Enumerate
9458 \begin_layout Standard
9459 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9465 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9466 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9470 \begin_layout Subsection
9471 Usage and General Features
9474 \begin_layout Standard
9475 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9476 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9485 is the innermost possible depth.
9486 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9489 \begin_layout Enumerate
9490 level #1 – outermost
9494 \begin_layout Enumerate
9499 \begin_layout Enumerate
9504 \begin_layout Enumerate
9509 \begin_layout Itemize
9514 \begin_layout Itemize
9523 \begin_layout Standard
9524 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9525 both of them in the example.
9526 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9536 For example, if we tried to nest another
9541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9548 , we would get errors.
9551 \begin_layout Subsection
9553 \begin_inset Index idx
9556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9565 \begin_layout Standard
9566 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9567 We have several examples of nested environments.
9568 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9572 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9573 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9576 \begin_layout Labeling
9577 \labelwidthstring MMM
9578 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9587 \begin_layout Labeling
9588 \labelwidthstring MMM
9589 #2-a This is level #2.
9590 We created it by using
9593 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9599 arg "depth-increment"
9606 \begin_layout Labeling
9607 \labelwidthstring MMM
9608 #3-a This is level #3.
9609 This time, we just enter
9616 arg "depth-increment"
9620 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9624 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9630 arg "depth-increment"
9637 \begin_layout Standard
9642 environment, nested inside of
9643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9651 So, it's at level #4.
9652 We did this by entering
9655 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9661 arg "depth-increment"
9664 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9669 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9685 \begin_layout Standard
9690 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9693 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9699 \begin_layout Labeling
9700 \labelwidthstring MMM
9701 #4-a This is level #4.
9705 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9708 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9713 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9717 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9722 keep nesting things inside
9723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9734 \begin_layout Labeling
9735 \labelwidthstring MMM
9736 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9741 \begin_layout Labeling
9742 \labelwidthstring MMM
9743 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9744 and this is level #6.
9745 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9749 \begin_layout Labeling
9750 \labelwidthstring MMM
9751 #5-b Back to level #5.
9755 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9761 arg "depth-decrement"
9768 \begin_layout Labeling
9769 \labelwidthstring MMM
9773 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9779 arg "depth-decrement"
9782 , we're back at level #4.
9786 \begin_layout Labeling
9787 \labelwidthstring MMM
9788 #3-b Back to level #3.
9789 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9793 \begin_layout Labeling
9794 \labelwidthstring MMM
9795 #2-b Back to level #2.
9800 \begin_layout Labeling
9801 \labelwidthstring MMM
9802 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9803 After this sentence, we will enter
9807 and change the paragraph environment back to
9814 \begin_layout Standard
9815 We could have also used the
9831 environment in place of the
9836 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9839 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9840 Example 2: Inheritance
9843 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9844 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9847 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9856 arg "depth-increment"
9860 \begin_inset Newline newline
9863 which, we will change to the
9871 \begin_layout Enumerate
9876 environment, at level #2.
9879 \begin_layout Enumerate
9880 Notice how the nested
9884 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9888 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9892 \begin_layout Standard
9893 We ended this example by entering
9898 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9902 and reset the nesting depth by using
9905 arg "depth-decrement"
9911 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9912 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9921 \begin_inset Argument 1
9924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9925 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9933 \begin_layout Enumerate
9934 This is level #1, in an
9938 paragraph environment.
9939 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9943 \begin_layout Enumerate
9948 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9954 arg "depth-increment"
9958 Now, what happens if we nest an
9962 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9963 label be? An asterisk?
9967 \begin_layout Itemize
9977 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9978 So, its label is a bullet.
9979 (We got here by using
9982 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9988 arg "depth-increment"
9991 , then changing the environment to
9999 \begin_layout Itemize
10000 Here's level #4, produced using
10003 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10009 arg "depth-increment"
10013 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10018 \begin_layout Enumerate
10020 to get to level #5.
10021 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10026 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10030 , because we are in the
10038 environment (that is, it is an
10053 \begin_layout Enumerate
10058 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10059 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10063 \begin_layout Enumerate
10064 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10067 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10070 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10073 \begin_layout Enumerate
10077 arg "depth-decrement"
10080 to decrease the depth after the next
10083 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10090 \begin_layout Enumerate
10092 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10097 \begin_layout Enumerate
10099 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10100 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10104 \begin_layout Enumerate
10105 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10114 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10119 reset the counter for the label.
10123 \begin_layout Enumerate
10127 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10133 arg "depth-decrement"
10136 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10137 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10138 into the twofold-nested
10146 \begin_layout Enumerate
10147 The same thing happens if we do another
10150 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10156 arg "depth-decrement"
10159 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10162 \begin_layout Standard
10163 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10168 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10179 The number of other
10183 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10190 The same rule applies for the
10194 environment, as well.
10197 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10198 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10201 \begin_layout Enumerate
10202 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10203 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10204 the same detail with how we did it.
10213 \begin_layout Standard
10221 arg "depth-increment"
10228 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10229 the example in parentheses someplace.
10230 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10231 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10232 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10236 \begin_layout Enumerate
10241 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10245 \begin_layout Verse
10246 Now we will add verse.
10247 \begin_inset Newline newline
10250 It will get much worse.
10251 \begin_inset Newline newline
10261 arg "depth-increment"
10271 \begin_layout Verse
10272 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10273 \begin_inset Newline newline
10276 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10277 \begin_inset Newline newline
10283 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10291 \begin_layout Verse
10292 Here comes a table:
10296 \begin_layout Standard
10297 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10303 \begin_layout Standard
10305 \begin_inset Tabular
10306 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10307 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10308 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10309 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10394 \begin_layout Verse
10398 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10408 arg "depth-increment"
10414 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10420 \begin_inset Newline newline
10428 arg "depth-decrement"
10435 \begin_layout Enumerate
10440 : level #1) This is another item.
10441 Note that selecting a
10445 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10446 3 times to put the table inside the
10454 \begin_layout Quotation
10455 We're now ending the
10459 list and changing to
10464 We're still at level #1.
10465 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10466 The next set of paragraphs is a
10467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10474 We will nest both the
10481 \begin_inset space ~
10486 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10490 for the letter body.
10494 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10497 to preserve the depth.
10498 Remember that you need to use
10501 arg "newline-insert newline"
10504 to create multiple lines inside the
10511 \begin_inset space ~
10521 \begin_layout Right Address
10523 \begin_inset Newline newline
10526 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10527 \begin_inset Newline newline
10533 \begin_layout Address
10535 \begin_inset space ~
10541 \begin_layout Quotation
10542 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10546 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10547 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10548 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10549 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10550 as soon as possible.
10551 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10554 \begin_layout Quotation
10555 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10556 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10557 with your order, along with payment.
10560 \begin_layout Quotation
10561 We thank you again for your patience.
10564 \begin_layout Address
10566 \begin_inset Newline newline
10573 \begin_layout Quotation
10574 That ends that example!
10577 \begin_layout Standard
10578 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10579 gives you a lot of power with just
10581 We could have easily nested an
10602 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10605 \begin_layout Subsection
10607 \begin_inset Index idx
10610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10611 Nesting ! Separation
10617 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10619 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10626 \begin_layout Standard
10627 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10629 For example you need two different enumerations:
10632 \begin_layout Enumerate
10637 \begin_layout Enumerate
10642 \begin_layout Enumerate
10646 \begin_layout Standard
10647 \begin_inset Separator plain
10653 \begin_layout Itemize
10659 \begin_layout Standard
10660 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10666 \begin_layout Enumerate
10670 \begin_layout Enumerate
10674 \begin_layout Enumerate
10678 \begin_layout Standard
10679 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10680 list item and use the menu
10682 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10683 Separated <Name> Above
10687 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10688 Separated <Name> Below
10691 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10692 ) and before or behind it the
10694 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10697 \begin_layout Standard
10698 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10699 (red arrow in LyX).
10700 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10701 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10704 \begin_layout Standard
10705 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10708 arg "paragraph-break"
10715 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10718 \begin_layout Section
10719 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10720 \begin_inset Index idx
10723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10732 \begin_layout Standard
10733 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10734 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10736 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10737 be broken at the end of a line.
10738 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10742 \begin_layout Subsection
10744 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10746 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10751 \begin_inset Index idx
10754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10763 \begin_layout Standard
10764 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10765 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10766 ) not to break the line at
10768 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10771 \begin_layout Quote
10772 Further documentation is given in section
10773 \begin_inset Newline newline
10777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10779 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10787 \begin_layout Standard
10788 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10803 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10812 A protected space is set with
10814 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10815 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10817 \begin_inset space ~
10825 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10831 \begin_layout Subsection
10833 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10835 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10840 \begin_inset Index idx
10843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10844 Spacing ! Horizontal
10852 \begin_layout Standard
10853 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10855 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10856 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10860 The length units are listed in Appendix
10861 \begin_inset space ~
10865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10867 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10874 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10876 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10878 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10883 \begin_inset Index idx
10886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10887 Spaces ! Inter-word
10895 \begin_layout Standard
10896 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10897 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10898 at the ends of sentences.
10899 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10900 automatically takes care about this.
10901 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10902 followed by a period; see section
10903 \begin_inset space ~
10907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10909 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10914 To insert a normal space, select
10916 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10917 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10919 \begin_inset space ~
10927 arg "space-insert normal"
10933 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10935 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10937 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10942 \begin_inset Index idx
10945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10954 \begin_layout Standard
10956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10963 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10972 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10973 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10974 inside abbreviations:
10977 \begin_layout Quote
10979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10983 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10986 \begin_layout Standard
10987 or between values and units.
10988 Compare for example this:
10989 \begin_inset Newline newline
10993 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10997 \begin_inset Newline newline
11000 10 kg (normal space
11003 \begin_layout Standard
11004 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11006 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11007 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11009 \begin_inset space ~
11017 arg "space-insert thin"
11023 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11027 \begin_layout Standard
11028 You can also insert the following space types:
11031 \begin_layout Description
11033 \begin_inset space ~
11037 \begin_inset space ~
11040 space A line with a
11041 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11045 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11049 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11052 negative thin space between the arrows.
11055 \begin_layout Description
11057 \begin_inset space ~
11061 \begin_inset space ~
11064 space A line with a
11065 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11069 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11073 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11076 negative medium space between the arrows.
11079 \begin_layout Description
11081 \begin_inset space ~
11085 \begin_inset space ~
11088 space A line with a
11089 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11093 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11097 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11100 negative thick space between the arrows.
11103 \begin_layout Description
11105 \begin_inset space ~
11109 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11113 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11117 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11121 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11125 \begin_inset space ~
11129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11132 em) space between the arrows.
11135 \begin_layout Description
11137 \begin_inset space ~
11141 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11145 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11149 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11153 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11157 \begin_inset space ~
11161 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11164 em) space between the arrows.
11167 \begin_layout Description
11169 \begin_inset space ~
11173 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11177 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11181 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11185 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11189 \begin_inset space ~
11193 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11196 em) space between the arrows.
11199 \begin_layout Description
11201 \begin_inset space ~
11205 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11209 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11214 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11218 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11221 cm space between the arrows.
11224 \begin_layout Standard
11226 \begin_inset space ~
11230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11232 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11236 lists the different space sizes.
11239 \begin_layout Standard
11240 \begin_inset Float table
11247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11248 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11251 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11253 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11257 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11267 \begin_inset Tabular
11268 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11269 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11270 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11271 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11311 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11335 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11359 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11383 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11387 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11391 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11439 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11454 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11467 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11482 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11495 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11510 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11544 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11546 \begin_inset Index idx
11549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11558 \begin_layout Standard
11559 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11560 feature for adding extra space
11561 in a uniform fashion.
11562 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11563 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11564 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11565 equally between themselves.
11568 \begin_layout Standard
11569 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11572 \begin_layout Quote
11574 This is on the left side
11575 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11578 This is on the right
11581 \begin_layout Quote
11584 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11588 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11594 \begin_layout Quote
11597 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11601 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11605 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11611 \begin_layout Standard
11612 That was an example in the
11618 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11622 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11626 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11629 is one in a standard paragraph.
11630 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11634 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11637 \begin_layout Standard
11638 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11641 \begin_inset space ~
11646 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11649 \begin_layout Standard
11651 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11655 \begin_inset space ~
11661 \begin_layout Standard
11663 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11667 \begin_inset space ~
11673 \begin_layout Standard
11675 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11679 \begin_inset space ~
11685 \begin_layout Standard
11687 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11691 \begin_inset space ~
11697 \begin_layout Standard
11699 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11703 \begin_inset space ~
11709 \begin_layout Standard
11711 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11715 \begin_inset space ~
11721 \begin_layout Standard
11722 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11730 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11734 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11736 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11737 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11741 option in the space dialog.
11749 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11751 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11753 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11758 \begin_inset Index idx
11761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11770 \begin_layout Standard
11771 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11772 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11775 \begin_layout Standard
11776 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11779 What is correct English?:
11780 \begin_inset Newline newline
11784 \begin_inset Newline newline
11788 \begin_inset space ~
11791 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11792 \begin_inset Newline newline
11796 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11807 \begin_inset Newline newline
11811 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11822 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11828 \begin_layout Standard
11830 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11835 \begin_inset space ~
11839 \begin_inset space ~
11843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11847 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11849 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11850 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11854 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11860 \begin_inset space ~
11864 \begin_inset space ~
11868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11871 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11880 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11881 That is why it is named
11882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11890 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11891 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11895 \begin_layout Subsection
11897 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11899 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11904 \begin_inset Index idx
11907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11916 \begin_layout Standard
11917 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11919 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11920 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11922 \begin_inset space ~
11928 There you find the following sizes:
11931 \begin_layout Standard
11944 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11945 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11950 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11952 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11953 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11955 \begin_inset space ~
11961 \begin_inset Index idx
11964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11965 Document ! Settings
11970 for the paragraph separation.
11971 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11982 \begin_layout Standard
11988 \begin_inset Index idx
11991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11997 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11998 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12003 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12004 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12013 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12022 s are described in section
12023 \begin_inset space ~
12027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12029 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12038 If there are several
12042 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12043 You can therefore use
12047 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12050 \begin_layout Standard
12055 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12056 \begin_inset space ~
12060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12062 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12069 \begin_layout Standard
12070 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12080 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12081 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12093 \begin_layout Subsection
12094 Paragraph Alignment
12095 \begin_inset Index idx
12098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12099 Paragraph ! Alignment
12107 \begin_layout Standard
12108 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12110 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12113 dialog (toolbar button
12116 arg "layout-paragraph"
12120 There are five possibilities:
12123 \begin_layout Itemize
12131 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12137 \begin_layout Itemize
12145 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12151 \begin_layout Itemize
12159 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12165 \begin_layout Itemize
12173 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12179 \begin_layout Itemize
12187 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12193 \begin_layout Standard
12194 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12195 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12196 the left and right margins.
12197 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12200 \begin_layout Standard
12202 This paragraph is right aligned,
12205 \begin_layout Standard
12207 this one is centered,
12210 \begin_layout Standard
12212 this one is left aligned.
12215 \begin_layout Subsection
12217 \begin_inset Index idx
12220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12221 Page breaks ! Forced
12227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12229 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12236 \begin_layout Standard
12237 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12238 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12239 force a page break where you want one.
12240 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12241 is good at page breaking.
12242 Only if you use a lot of
12246 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12247 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12250 \begin_layout Standard
12251 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12252 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12256 have to change the page breaking.
12259 \begin_layout Standard
12260 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12262 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12264 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12265 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12267 \begin_inset space ~
12273 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12275 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12276 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12278 \begin_inset space ~
12283 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12285 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12286 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12289 \begin_layout Standard
12290 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12291 at the top of a page.
12292 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12294 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12295 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12296 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12300 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12304 to learn more about
12311 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12313 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12315 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12320 \begin_inset Index idx
12323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12324 Page breaks ! Clear
12332 \begin_layout Standard
12333 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12334 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12335 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12336 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12337 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12340 \begin_layout Standard
12341 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12343 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12344 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12346 \begin_inset space ~
12352 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12354 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12355 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12357 \begin_inset space ~
12361 \begin_inset space ~
12366 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12367 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12370 \begin_layout Subsection
12372 \begin_inset Index idx
12375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12382 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12384 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12391 \begin_layout Standard
12392 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12394 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12396 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12397 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12399 \begin_inset space ~
12403 \begin_inset space ~
12411 arg "newline-insert newline"
12415 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12417 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12418 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12420 \begin_inset space ~
12424 \begin_inset space ~
12432 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12435 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12437 This is useful to avoid
12438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12445 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12448 \begin_layout Standard
12449 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12450 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12452 very good at line breaking.
12453 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12454 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12455 \begin_inset space ~
12459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12461 reference "sec:Quote"
12466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12468 reference "sec:Verse"
12473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12475 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12482 \begin_layout Subsection
12484 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12486 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12491 \begin_inset Index idx
12494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12503 \begin_layout Standard
12505 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12516 \begin_layout Standard
12520 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12521 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12523 \begin_inset space ~
12528 you can insert horizontal lines.
12529 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12530 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12531 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12534 \begin_layout Standard
12536 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12547 \begin_layout Section
12548 Characters and Symbols
12551 \begin_layout Standard
12552 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12553 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12554 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12556 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12562 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12566 for information on how this is done.
12569 \begin_layout Standard
12570 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12575 dialog via the menu
12577 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12578 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12584 \begin_layout Standard
12585 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12593 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12594 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12596 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12604 \begin_layout Section
12605 Fonts and Text Styles
12606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12608 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12615 \begin_layout Subsection
12617 \begin_inset Index idx
12620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12629 \begin_layout Standard
12630 There are two types of fonts:
12633 \begin_layout Description
12635 \begin_inset space ~
12639 \begin_inset Index idx
12642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12648 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12649 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12653 characters) in the font.
12654 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12655 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12656 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12657 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12658 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12659 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12660 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12661 \begin_inset Newline newline
12664 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12665 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12666 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12667 sizes than at small ones.
12668 \begin_inset Newline newline
12682 \begin_inset space ~
12690 \begin_layout Description
12692 \begin_inset space ~
12696 \begin_inset Index idx
12699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12705 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12706 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12707 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12708 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12709 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12710 image manipulation program.
12711 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12712 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12713 \begin_inset space ~
12716 pixels high up to 34
12717 \begin_inset space ~
12720 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12721 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12722 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12724 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12725 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12726 \begin_inset Newline newline
12729 Bitmap fonts are named
12732 \begin_inset space ~
12737 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12740 \begin_layout Standard
12741 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12742 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12743 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12744 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12745 use scalable fonts.
12748 \begin_layout Standard
12749 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12752 \begin_layout Standard
12753 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12755 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
12757 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757415
12760 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12761 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12762 font to emphasize text, you use an
12763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12771 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12773 In \SpecialChar LyX
12774 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12778 \begin_layout Subsection
12781 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12783 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12790 \begin_layout Standard
12791 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12792 used its own fonts.
12793 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12794 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12797 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12798 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12799 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12800 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12801 to a word processor.
12802 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12803 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12804 files are very portable across
12805 different machines.
12806 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12807 has increased a lot
12808 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12811 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12813 \begin_inset space ~
12817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12819 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12824 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12825 code in the document
12826 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12829 \begin_layout Standard
12830 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12831 engines that are also able directly
12832 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12834 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12836 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12838 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12839 that is installed on your system.
12840 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12843 \begin_layout Standard
12844 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12852 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12853 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12861 \begin_layout Subsection
12862 Document Font and Font size
12863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12865 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12870 \begin_inset Index idx
12873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12880 \begin_inset Index idx
12883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12892 \begin_layout Standard
12893 You can set the document fonts in the
12895 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12899 \begin_inset Index idx
12902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12903 Document ! Settings
12913 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12914 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12917 \begin_inset space ~
12926 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12928 \begin_inset space ~
12931 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12934 \begin_layout Standard
12939 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12940 This requires that you use
12952 as the output format, i.
12953 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12957 \begin_inset space \space{}
12960 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12961 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12962 installed (see section
12963 \begin_inset space ~
12967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12969 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12974 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12976 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12977 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12979 \begin_inset space ~
12982 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12983 cannot determine the family.
12984 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12985 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12988 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12991 \begin_layout Standard
12992 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12993 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12998 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13004 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13006 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13008 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13011 font encoding, this is
13012 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13013 , depending on the document language,
13016 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13017 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13025 \begin_inset space ~
13031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13041 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13042 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13050 \begin_inset space ~
13056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13064 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13085 European Computer Modern
13088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13096 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13099 \begin_layout Standard
13104 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13105 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13110 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13113 \begin_inset space ~
13118 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13124 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13125 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13128 \begin_layout Itemize
13132 \begin_inset space ~
13137 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13150 \begin_inset space ~
13155 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13156 community in order to replace
13160 as the default font.
13161 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13162 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13165 \begin_inset space ~
13178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13179 One difference is improved kerning.
13187 \begin_layout Itemize
13188 If you do not like the look of
13196 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13197 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13201 \begin_inset space ~
13207 \begin_inset space ~
13217 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13218 \begin_inset space ~
13221 serif and typewriter fonts,
13225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13226 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13233 \begin_inset space ~
13242 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13243 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13247 \begin_inset space \space{}
13255 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13259 \begin_inset space \space{}
13265 \begin_inset space ~
13273 \begin_inset space ~
13283 but you can also select your own.
13284 \begin_inset Newline newline
13287 The differences between roman,
13290 \begin_inset space ~
13299 fonts are explained in section
13300 \begin_inset space ~
13304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13306 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13311 \begin_inset Newline newline
13317 \begin_inset space ~
13322 was originally designed for newspapers.
13323 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13324 into the small newspaper columns.
13328 \begin_inset space ~
13333 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13336 \begin_layout Standard
13337 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13350 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13355 depends on the class you are using.
13356 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13359 \begin_layout Standard
13360 Note that the font size is the
13365 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13366 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13367 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13368 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13371 \begin_inset space ~
13377 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13378 \begin_inset space ~
13382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13384 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13391 \begin_layout Standard
13395 \begin_inset space ~
13400 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13402 \begin_inset space ~
13405 serif or typewriter.
13410 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13420 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13423 \begin_layout Standard
13428 LaTeX font encoding
13430 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13431 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13437 \begin_inset Index idx
13440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13448 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13450 \begin_inset space ~
13454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13456 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13463 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13464 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13465 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13469 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13477 \begin_layout Standard
13478 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13480 Use Old Style Figures
13484 Use True Small Caps
13487 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13490 Use Old Style Figures
13492 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13494 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13495 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13499 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13502 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13506 Use True Small Caps
13508 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13509 of scaled capitals.
13510 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13511 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13512 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
13516 \begin_layout Standard
13518 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
13519 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
13520 provided by the font package (or the
13524 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
13529 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
13535 \begin_layout Standard
13540 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13541 a font to display the script characters.
13545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13546 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13552 \begin_inset Index idx
13555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13562 So this has no effect for the document language
13578 \begin_layout Standard
13581 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13583 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13584 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13590 \begin_inset Index idx
13593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13595 packages ! microtype
13604 \begin_layout Standard
13607 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13609 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13614 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13615 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13621 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13622 \begin_inset space ~
13626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13628 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13638 \begin_layout Standard
13639 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13643 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13651 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13656 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13657 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13659 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13661 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13664 dialog, see section
13665 \begin_inset space ~
13669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13671 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13683 \begin_layout Subsection
13687 \begin_layout Standard
13688 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13689 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13691 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13692 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13693 choose a math font in the dialog
13695 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13699 \begin_inset Index idx
13702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13703 Document ! Settings
13709 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13710 automatically selects a math font.
13711 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13712 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13721 \begin_inset space ~
13727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13732 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13733 document font is available.
13736 \begin_layout Standard
13737 Note that the math font will not be used for
13741 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13747 or by the insertion of the command
13754 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13755 \begin_inset space ~
13759 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13760 while the math characters do not.
13762 \begin_inset space ~
13765 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13768 \begin_inset space ~
13776 \begin_inset space ~
13781 in the document font settings.
13784 \begin_layout Standard
13785 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13786 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13787 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13788 font (in most cases
13789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13795 \begin_inset space ~
13801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13804 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13805 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13813 \begin_inset space ~
13819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13825 \begin_layout Subsection
13827 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
13829 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
13833 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
13835 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13837 name "subsec:charstyles"
13844 \begin_inset Index idx
13847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13854 \begin_inset Index idx
13857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13866 \begin_layout Standard
13867 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13868 automatically changes the
13869 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
13872 style for certain paragraph environments.
13874 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
13875 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
13877 This is where we meet the concept of
13883 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
13885 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
13889 \begin_layout Standard
13891 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
13896 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
13898 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
13911 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
13917 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13920 e., available with all document classes.
13921 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
13925 for specific purposes.
13926 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
13929 \begin_layout Standard
13931 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
13932 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
13942 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
13946 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
13947 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13959 — you customized the
13964 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
13965 among them, encourage the use of
13977 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
13978 \begin_inset space ~
13982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13984 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13989 Rather than fiddling with
13993 , they encourage the use of
13997 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
13998 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14002 \begin_inset Quotes els
14006 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14009 ), not their form (
14010 \begin_inset Quotes els
14014 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14018 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14019 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14020 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14021 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14022 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14023 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14029 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14030 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14033 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14034 With a semantic markup (such as
14038 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14043 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14045 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14046 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14049 \begin_layout Standard
14051 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14052 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14053 by \SpecialChar LyX
14059 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14061 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14062 Builtin Text Styles
14063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14065 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14072 \begin_layout Standard
14074 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14075 The two builtin text styles can be
14076 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14080 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14084 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14085 both of these styles
14088 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14096 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14102 \begin_layout Standard
14107 style, do one of the following:
14110 \begin_layout Itemize
14111 click on the toolbar button
14120 \begin_layout Itemize
14121 use the key binding
14128 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14132 \begin_layout Itemize
14134 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14142 arg "dialog-show character"
14148 arg "dialog-show character"
14151 ) as described in section
14152 \begin_inset space ~
14156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14158 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14167 \begin_layout Standard
14168 These commands are all toggles.
14173 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14176 \begin_layout Standard
14177 One typically uses the
14181 style for proper names.
14183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14190 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14196 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14200 \begin_layout Standard
14202 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14207 is producing text in
14211 , but the definition can be changed.
14216 \begin_layout Standard
14218 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14220 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14228 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14235 \begin_layout Itemize
14236 clicking on the toolbar button
14245 \begin_layout Itemize
14246 using the keybindings
14253 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14257 \begin_layout Itemize
14259 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14267 arg "dialog-show character"
14273 arg "dialog-show character"
14276 ) as described in section
14277 \begin_inset space ~
14281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14283 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14292 \begin_layout Standard
14297 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14299 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14301 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14304 packages use a different font
14305 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14306 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14312 \begin_layout Standard
14313 We've been using the
14317 style all over the place in this document.
14318 Here's one more example:
14321 \begin_layout Quotation
14325 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14327 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14333 \begin_layout Standard
14334 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14335 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14336 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14337 the common tendency to overuse
14338 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14340 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14345 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14349 \begin_layout Standard
14351 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14352 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14353 only as font changes and integrated in the
14361 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14364 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14371 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14373 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14377 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14380 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14382 \begin_inset space ~
14385 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14387 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14393 arg "dialog-show character"
14399 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14401 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14407 arg "dialog-show character"
14411 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14415 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14417 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14419 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14421 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14428 \begin_layout Standard
14430 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14431 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14433 \begin_inset space ~
14437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14439 reference "subsec:Modules"
14446 ), or local layout settings (see section
14447 \begin_inset space ~
14451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14453 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14458 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14462 markup for specific functions.
14463 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14468 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14478 \begin_inset Quotes els
14482 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14488 \begin_layout Standard
14490 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14491 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14493 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14499 \begin_layout Standard
14501 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14502 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14507 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14508 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14509 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14514 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14515 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14520 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14528 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14529 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14530 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14531 \begin_inset Flex Code
14534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14536 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14545 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14550 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14559 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14564 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14573 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
14574 on screen their formal appearance.
14579 \begin_layout Subsection
14581 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
14583 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
14587 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
14593 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
14595 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
14601 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
14603 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
14607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14609 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14614 \begin_inset Index idx
14617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14626 \begin_layout Standard
14627 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
14628 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
14631 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
14633 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
14635 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
14639 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
14640 the properties of text passages
14641 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
14645 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14646 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14647 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14648 from ordinary dialog.
14649 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
14653 \begin_layout Standard
14655 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
14656 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
14657 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
14658 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
14659 the properties of the respective text passages.
14664 comes in as a last resort.
14669 \begin_layout Standard
14670 Before we document how to
14671 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
14672 use custom character style
14673 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
14674 tweak the text properties
14676 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
14677 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
14679 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
14683 \begin_inset Newline newline
14686 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14687 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14690 \begin_layout Standard
14692 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
14693 use custom character styles
14694 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
14695 tweak text properties
14698 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
14701 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14703 \begin_inset space ~
14706 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14708 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
14714 arg "dialog-show character"
14719 dialog or press the toolbar button
14722 arg "dialog-show character"
14727 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
14730 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14731 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
14733 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
14736 property that you can choose.
14737 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14740 \begin_inset space ~
14745 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14747 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
14751 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
14753 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
14758 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14759 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14760 environments all at once.
14763 \begin_layout Standard
14765 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
14767 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
14770 properties, and their options (in addition to
14773 \begin_inset space ~
14779 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
14783 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
14791 \begin_layout Labeling
14792 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14806 The possible options are:
14810 \begin_layout Labeling
14811 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14816 This is the Roman font family.
14817 Normally a serif font.
14818 It's also the default family.
14828 \begin_layout Labeling
14829 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14833 \begin_inset space ~
14840 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14852 \begin_layout Labeling
14853 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14860 This is the Typewriter font family.
14866 arg "font-typewriter"
14872 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
14876 \begin_layout Standard
14878 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
14879 The general differences of these families are:
14882 \begin_layout Itemize
14884 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
14889 fonts use characters with serifs.
14890 These are the small
14891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14898 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14899 The following example shows the difference:
14900 \begin_inset Newline newline
14904 \begin_inset Newline newline
14909 text without serifs
14912 \begin_inset Newline newline
14915 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14916 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14923 \begin_layout Itemize
14925 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14930 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14931 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14932 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14935 \begin_layout Itemize
14937 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14950 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14968 \begin_inset Newline newline
14972 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14977 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14988 \begin_inset Note Note
14991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14993 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14994 For more on phantoms see section
14995 \begin_inset space ~
14999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15001 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15011 \begin_inset Newline newline
15020 \begin_layout Labeling
15021 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15026 This corresponds to the print weight.
15031 \begin_layout Labeling
15032 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15037 This is the Medium font series.
15038 It's also the default series.
15041 \begin_layout Labeling
15042 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15049 This is the Bold font series.
15062 \begin_layout Labeling
15063 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15068 As the name implies.
15073 \begin_layout Labeling
15074 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15079 This is the Upright font shape.
15080 It's also the default shape.
15083 \begin_layout Labeling
15084 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15094 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15099 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15104 s the Italic font shape
15110 \begin_layout Labeling
15111 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15118 This is the Slanted font shape
15120 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15121 , this is different from italic).
15124 \begin_layout Labeling
15125 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15129 \begin_inset space ~
15136 This is the Small caps font shape
15143 \begin_layout Labeling
15144 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15149 Alters the text color.
15150 Note that not all DVI
15151 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15153 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15156 viewers are able to display colors.
15158 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15162 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15164 \begin_inset space ~
15171 , which means that the document default color set in
15173 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15174 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15180 \begin_inset space ~
15186 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15188 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15192 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15272 \begin_inset Index idx
15275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15284 \begin_layout Labeling
15285 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15290 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15291 the language of the document.
15292 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15293 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15294 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15297 in blue to indicate the change
15298 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15299 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15303 \begin_inset Newline newline
15306 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15308 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15309 When using the spell checking (see section
15310 \begin_inset space ~
15314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15316 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15320 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15321 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15323 \begin_inset Newline newline
15326 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15328 Exclude from Spellchecking
15331 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15334 \begin_layout Labeling
15335 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15340 Alters the size of the font.
15342 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15344 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15348 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15351 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15352 document font size.
15353 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15354 the details, but a general description of what
15360 \begin_layout Labeling
15361 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15382 arg "font-size tiny"
15388 \begin_layout Labeling
15389 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15410 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15416 \begin_layout Labeling
15417 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15438 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15444 \begin_layout Labeling
15445 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15466 arg "font-size small"
15472 \begin_layout Labeling
15473 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15487 It's also the default size.
15491 arg "font-size normal"
15497 \begin_layout Labeling
15498 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15519 arg "font-size large"
15525 \begin_layout Labeling
15526 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15547 arg "font-size larger"
15553 \begin_layout Labeling
15554 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15575 arg "font-size largest"
15581 \begin_layout Labeling
15582 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15603 arg "font-size huge"
15609 \begin_layout Labeling
15610 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15631 arg "font-size giant"
15637 \begin_layout Labeling
15638 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15643 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
15644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15663 arg "font-size increase"
15669 \begin_layout Labeling
15670 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15675 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
15676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15695 arg "font-size decrease"
15702 \begin_layout Standard
15707 : don't go crazy with this feature.
15708 You should almost never need to change the font size.
15710 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
15711 — use those instead.
15712 This is here for fine-tuning only!
15715 \begin_layout Labeling
15716 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15718 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
15722 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
15728 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
15729 change a few other things at the character level
15730 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
15731 have text passages being underlined
15735 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
15736 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
15737 days, when you could not change fonts.
15738 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15739 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15740 because some people
15744 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15751 \begin_layout Labeling
15752 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15754 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
15761 This is text with emphasize on
15764 This might seem like the same as
15768 , but it is actually a bit different.
15774 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
15776 Normally this font is equal to italic.
15777 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
15781 \begin_layout Labeling
15782 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15784 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
15789 Don't use underlining.
15794 \begin_layout Labeling
15795 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15797 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
15801 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
15809 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
15811 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
15820 arg "font-underline"
15826 \begin_inset Newline newline
15830 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
15833 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
15834 when you could not change fonts.
15835 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15836 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15837 because some people
15841 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15846 \begin_layout Labeling
15847 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15851 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
15853 \begin_inset space ~
15862 This is text with Double under
15863 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
15865 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
15874 arg "font-underunderline"
15878 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
15880 \begin_inset Newline newline
15883 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
15884 about double underbar
15889 \begin_layout Labeling
15890 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15894 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
15896 \begin_inset space ~
15905 This is text with Wavy under
15906 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
15908 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
15917 arg "font-underwave"
15921 \begin_inset Newline newline
15924 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
15925 Keep antinausea pills handy.
15926 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
15931 \begin_layout Labeling
15932 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15934 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
15939 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
15945 \begin_layout Labeling
15946 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15948 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
15953 Don't use strikethrough.
15956 \begin_layout Labeling
15957 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15961 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
15963 \begin_inset space ~
15967 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
15975 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
15977 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
15978 Single strikethrough
15986 arg "font-strikeout"
15990 \begin_inset Newline newline
15993 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
15994 changed in the meantime.
15997 \begin_layout Labeling
15998 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16000 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
16004 \begin_inset space ~
16008 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16010 \begin_inset space ~
16014 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16022 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16024 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16030 \begin_inset Newline newline
16033 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16037 \begin_layout Standard
16039 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
16040 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
16041 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
16042 \begin_inset space ~
16046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16048 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16055 \begin_layout Itemize
16057 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
16064 This is text with emphasize on
16069 \begin_layout Itemize
16073 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
16080 This is text with Noun on.
16082 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16089 , this is a logical attribute.
16090 Normally it's equivalent to
16093 \begin_inset space ~
16103 \begin_layout Standard
16104 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16105 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16107 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16112 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16113 chosen a new character style
16114 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16115 applied a text property
16118 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16121 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16123 \begin_inset space ~
16126 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16128 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16134 arg "dialog-show character"
16142 arg "dialog-show character"
16145 ) dialog, the settings are
16146 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16150 You can activate the
16151 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16153 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16154 last applied properties
16156 by using the toolbar button
16159 arg "textstyle-apply"
16163 The button lets you apply
16164 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16165 your custom character style
16166 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16169 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16171 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16172 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16173 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16174 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16179 \begin_layout Standard
16180 To completely reset the
16181 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16183 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16184 text properties of a selection
16186 to the default, use
16187 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16189 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16199 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16204 from the menu of the toolbar button
16207 arg "textstyle-apply"
16214 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16215 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16216 you just set the shape to
16217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16235 \begin_inset space ~
16249 \begin_layout Standard
16251 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16252 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16260 \begin_inset space ~
16272 \begin_layout Itemize
16274 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16287 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16305 \begin_inset Newline newline
16309 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16323 \begin_inset Note Note
16326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16327 For more on phantoms see section
16328 \begin_inset space ~
16332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16334 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16344 \begin_inset Newline newline
16350 \begin_layout Itemize
16352 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16357 fonts use characters with serifs.
16358 These are the small
16359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16366 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16367 The following example shows the difference:
16368 \begin_inset Newline newline
16372 \begin_inset Newline newline
16377 text without serifs
16380 \begin_inset Newline newline
16383 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16384 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16391 \begin_layout Itemize
16393 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16398 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16399 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16400 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16405 \begin_layout Standard
16407 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16415 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16416 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16419 \begin_inset space ~
16424 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16425 the property to be removed.
16426 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16427 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16428 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16446 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16447 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16455 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16459 \begin_inset space ~
16464 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16475 If you, for example, set
16476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16494 \begin_inset space ~
16499 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16508 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16513 \begin_layout Standard
16515 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16518 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16519 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16522 \begin_layout Section
16523 Printing and Previewing
16526 \begin_layout Subsection
16530 \begin_layout Standard
16531 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16532 using \SpecialChar LyX
16533 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16534 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16535 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16536 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16538 Additional Features
16543 \begin_layout Standard
16545 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16548 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16549 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16550 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16553 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16554 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16555 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16556 to turn your writing into printable output.
16557 This happens in two stages:
16560 \begin_layout Enumerate
16561 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16562 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16564 a file with the extension,
16565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16579 \begin_layout Enumerate
16580 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
16581 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16582 to use the commands in the
16586 file to produce printable output.
16589 \begin_layout Subsection
16590 Output file formats
16591 \begin_inset Index idx
16594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16603 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
16610 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16611 Simple text (ASCII)
16612 \begin_inset Index idx
16615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16616 File formats ! ASCII
16624 \begin_layout Standard
16625 This file type has the extension
16626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16638 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
16639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16642 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
16643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16649 \begin_layout Standard
16650 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
16652 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16653 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16655 \begin_inset space ~
16661 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
16662 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
16663 bibliography (section
16664 \begin_inset space ~
16668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16670 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
16675 If your document includes such material, use
16677 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16678 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16680 \begin_inset space ~
16684 \begin_inset space ~
16688 \begin_inset space ~
16696 \begin_inset space ~
16700 \begin_inset space ~
16706 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
16707 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
16710 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16713 \begin_inset Index idx
16716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16717 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
16726 \begin_layout Standard
16727 This file type has the extension
16728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16739 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16742 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
16743 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
16744 -Errors or to process it manually
16745 with console commands.
16746 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
16747 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
16748 's temporary directory whenever you
16749 view or export your document.
16752 \begin_layout Standard
16753 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
16754 -file using the menu
16756 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16757 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16761 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
16762 export variants are explained in section
16763 \begin_inset space ~
16767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16769 reference "subsec:Export"
16776 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16778 \begin_inset Index idx
16781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16790 \begin_layout Standard
16791 This file type has the extension
16792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16812 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
16813 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
16814 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
16818 \begin_layout Standard
16819 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
16820 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
16821 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
16822 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
16823 when you view the DVI.
16824 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
16827 \begin_layout Standard
16828 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
16830 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16831 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16836 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16837 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16839 \begin_inset space ~
16845 The latter option uses the program
16847 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16853 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16856 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16857 font access (see section
16858 \begin_inset space ~
16862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16864 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16869 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16870 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16875 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16877 \begin_inset Index idx
16880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16881 File formats ! PostScript
16889 \begin_layout Standard
16890 This file type has the extension
16891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16903 PostScript was developed by the company
16907 as a printer language.
16908 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
16910 PostScript can be seen as a
16911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16914 programming language
16915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16918 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
16922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16923 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16930 \begin_inset Index idx
16933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16935 packages ! pstricks
16945 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
16948 \begin_layout Standard
16949 PostScript can only contain images in the format
16950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16953 Encapsulated PostScript
16954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16957 (EPS, file extension
16958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16970 As \SpecialChar LyX
16971 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
16972 convert them in the background to EPS.
16973 If, for example, you have 50
16974 \begin_inset space ~
16977 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
16979 \begin_inset space ~
16982 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
16983 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
16985 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
16986 EPS to avoid this problem.
16989 \begin_layout Standard
16990 You can export to PostScript using the menu
16992 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16993 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16999 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17001 \begin_inset Index idx
17004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17011 \begin_inset Index idx
17014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17023 \begin_layout Standard
17024 This file type has the extension
17025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17041 Portable Document Format
17042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17049 was derived from PostScript.
17050 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
17052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17059 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
17060 looks exactly the same.
17063 \begin_layout Standard
17064 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
17065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17068 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17072 (JPG, file extension
17073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17100 Portable Network Graphics
17101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17104 (PNG, file extension
17105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17117 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17118 converts them in the
17119 background to one of these formats.
17120 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17121 will slow down your workflow.
17122 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17125 \begin_layout Standard
17126 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17128 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17134 \begin_layout Description
17136 \begin_inset space ~
17139 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17143 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17146 \begin_layout Description
17148 \begin_inset space ~
17155 ) This uses the program
17157 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17160 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17163 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17166 is a new engine, derived from
17170 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17171 access (see section
17172 \begin_inset space ~
17176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17178 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17183 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17184 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17189 \begin_layout Description
17191 \begin_inset space ~
17198 ) This uses the program
17203 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17209 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17210 font access (see section
17211 \begin_inset space ~
17215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17217 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17222 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17223 vertically written Japanese.
17226 \begin_layout Description
17228 \begin_inset space ~
17231 (cropped) This is the same as
17234 \begin_inset space ~
17239 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17240 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17241 to generate good-looking
17242 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17245 \begin_layout Description
17247 \begin_inset space ~
17250 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17254 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17258 \begin_layout Description
17260 \begin_inset space ~
17263 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17267 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17268 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17272 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17273 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17276 \begin_layout Standard
17280 \begin_inset space ~
17289 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17290 works without problems.
17291 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17292 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17296 \begin_inset space ~
17304 \begin_inset space ~
17309 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17317 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17319 \begin_inset Index idx
17322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17323 FileFormats ! XHTML
17329 \begin_inset Index idx
17332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17341 \begin_layout Standard
17342 This file type has the extension
17343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17355 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17356 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17357 When \SpecialChar LyX
17358 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17359 suitable for the purpose.
17360 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17362 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17363 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17366 between different formats, which are described in section
17368 Math Output in XHTML
17373 \begin_inset space ~
17381 \begin_layout Standard
17382 XHTML output remains
17383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17390 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17391 features are supported yet.
17395 and the World Wide Web
17399 Additional Features
17401 manual, for more information.
17404 \begin_layout Standard
17405 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17407 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17408 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17414 \begin_layout Subsection
17416 \begin_inset Index idx
17419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17428 \begin_layout Standard
17429 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17430 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17439 or use the toolbar button
17446 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17447 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17448 \begin_inset space ~
17452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17454 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17458 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17460 \begin_inset space ~
17464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17466 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17471 Further output formats can be selected via
17473 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17474 View (Other Formats)
17476 or the toolbar button
17485 \begin_layout Standard
17486 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17487 viewer window using the menu
17489 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17494 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17495 Update (Other Formats)
17500 \begin_layout Standard
17501 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17504 To have a real output, export your document.
17507 \begin_layout Section
17508 A few Words about Typography
17509 \begin_inset Index idx
17512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17521 \begin_layout Subsection
17522 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17523 \begin_inset Index idx
17526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17533 \begin_inset Index idx
17536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17545 \begin_layout Standard
17546 In \SpecialChar LyX
17548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17559 symbol comes in four variants: the
17576 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17582 \begin_layout Standard
17583 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17593 height_special "totalheight"
17598 backgroundcolor "none"
17601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17602 \begin_inset Tabular
17603 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
17604 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17605 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17606 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17607 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17608 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17609 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17637 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17638 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17677 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17678 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17700 system key combination
17704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17705 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
17708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17717 and the em dash with
17720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17733 is the Mac label for the right
17744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17757 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17758 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17780 system key combination or
17781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17795 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17808 \begin_inset Formula $-$
17816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17847 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17853 \begin_layout Standard
17854 Dashes can also be inserted with
17856 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17858 \begin_inset space ~
17861 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
17869 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
17870 and 2014 for the en dash).
17873 \begin_layout Standard
17874 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
17875 mode and has a length of its own.
17876 Here are some examples:
17879 \begin_layout Enumerate
17880 line- and page-breaks
17881 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17891 \begin_layout Enumerate
17893 \begin_inset space ~
17897 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17907 \begin_layout Enumerate
17908 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
17909 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17919 \begin_layout Enumerate
17920 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
17924 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17934 \begin_layout Standard
17936 \begin_inset CommandInset href
17938 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
17939 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
17947 \begin_layout Subsection
17948 Dashes and Line Breaks
17949 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17951 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
17958 \begin_layout Standard
17959 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
17960 case and locale, e.
17961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17967 \begin_layout Itemize
17968 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
17969 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
17972 \begin_layout Itemize
17973 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
17977 \begin_layout Itemize
17978 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
17979 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
17982 \begin_layout Standard
17983 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
17984 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17995 allows line breaks after hyphens
17996 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
17998 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
18001 en-dashes and em-dashes.
18004 \begin_layout Enumerate
18005 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
18006 \begin_inset space ~
18009 – common in British English and generally recommended by
18011 The Elements of Typographic Style
18014 \begin_inset space ~
18017 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
18020 \begin_layout Enumerate
18021 Unwanted line breaks
18026 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
18028 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
18031 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
18035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18038 Prevent Hyphenation
18043 \begin_inset space ~
18059 in \SpecialChar TeX
18061 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
18062 , a protected space does not suffice
18066 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
18071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18073 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
18074 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
18075 in the document language.
18076 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
18090 \begin_layout Itemize
18092 \begin_inset space ~
18096 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18106 height_special "totalheight"
18111 backgroundcolor "none"
18114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18123 \begin_layout Itemize
18125 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18135 height_special "totalheight"
18140 backgroundcolor "none"
18143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18145 \begin_inset space ~
18153 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18154 \begin_inset space ~
18157 – sont très utiles.
18160 \begin_layout Itemize
18165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18174 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18178 \begin_layout Standard
18179 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18180 \begin_inset space ~
18183 – in contrast to an overfull line
18184 \begin_inset space ~
18187 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18191 \begin_layout Standard
18192 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18195 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18196 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18197 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18198 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18203 \begin_layout Enumerate
18204 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18205 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18206 or \SpecialChar TeX
18212 \begin_layout Itemize
18214 \begin_inset space ~
18217 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18218 \begin_inset space ~
18221 – sont très utiles.
18225 \begin_layout Enumerate
18226 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18227 \begin_inset Newline newline
18232 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18233 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18234 Optional line break
18240 \begin_layout Itemize
18241 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18242 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18243 should be followed by
18244 a line break opportunity.
18247 \begin_layout Standard
18248 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18249 \begin_inset space ~
18253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18255 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18266 \begin_layout Enumerate
18267 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18268 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18269 or en dashes (see section
18270 \begin_inset space ~
18274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18276 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18286 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18287 Changes and backwards compatibility
18290 \begin_layout Standard
18291 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18293 \begin_inset space ~
18296 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18297 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18306 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18307 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18315 \begin_layout Standard
18316 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18318 \begin_inset space ~
18321 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18323 prevents ligation to dashes.
18325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18332 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18337 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18338 after the input (unless the current text font is
18346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18347 The behavior was changed since
18348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18363 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18364 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18365 as non-breakable dashes.
18366 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18375 \begin_layout Standard
18378 \begin_inset space ~
18386 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18388 \begin_inset space ~
18391 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18394 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18395 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18396 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18397 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18399 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18403 If you used both literal and
18404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18411 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18413 \begin_inset space ~
18416 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18417 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18420 \begin_layout Subsection
18422 \begin_inset Index idx
18425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18432 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18434 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18441 \begin_layout Standard
18442 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18443 but automatically in the output.
18444 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18450 \begin_inset Index idx
18453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18460 following the rules of the document language.
18462 does not hyphenate text in the
18466 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18469 \begin_layout Standard
18471 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18475 font and with unusual constructs, like
18476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18484 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18485 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18486 This is done with the menu
18488 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18489 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18491 \begin_inset space ~
18497 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18499 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18503 \begin_layout Standard
18504 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18505 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18516 would then see the hyphen
18517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18524 as a line break possibility.
18525 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18526 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
18529 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18530 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18533 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
18535 Prevent Hyphenation
18540 \begin_inset space ~
18548 \begin_layout Subsection
18550 \begin_inset Index idx
18553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18562 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18563 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
18564 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18566 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
18573 \begin_layout Standard
18574 When \SpecialChar LyX
18575 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18576 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18578 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
18581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18584 appropriate amount of space.
18585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18588 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
18590 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
18591 gets after another word.
18594 \begin_layout Standard
18595 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
18596 not work in all cases.
18598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18609 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
18610 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
18613 \begin_layout Standard
18614 Here are some examples of
18618 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
18621 \begin_layout Itemize
18626 \begin_layout Itemize
18631 \begin_layout Standard
18632 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
18635 \begin_layout Itemize
18637 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18641 this is too much space!
18644 \begin_layout Itemize
18649 \begin_layout Standard
18650 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
18653 \begin_layout Standard
18654 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
18657 \begin_layout Enumerate
18661 \begin_inset space ~
18666 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
18667 \begin_inset space ~
18671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18673 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
18678 \begin_inset Index idx
18681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18682 Spaces ! inter-word
18690 \begin_layout Enumerate
18694 \begin_inset space ~
18699 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
18700 \begin_inset space ~
18704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18706 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
18711 \begin_inset Index idx
18714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18723 \begin_layout Enumerate
18727 \begin_inset space ~
18731 \begin_inset space ~
18735 \begin_inset space ~
18742 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18744 \begin_inset space ~
18749 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
18750 This function is also bound to
18753 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
18759 \begin_layout Standard
18760 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
18763 \begin_layout Itemize
18765 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18769 \begin_inset space \space{}
18772 this is too much space!
18775 \begin_layout Itemize
18776 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
18780 \begin_layout Standard
18781 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
18782 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
18784 will take care of this.
18787 \begin_layout Standard
18788 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
18792 \begin_inset space ~
18798 feature described in the section
18800 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
18805 Additional Features
18810 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18812 \begin_inset Index idx
18815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18816 Typography ! Quotation marks
18822 \begin_inset Index idx
18825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18826 Quotation marks | see
18830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18856 \begin_layout Standard
18858 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
18859 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
18860 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
18862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18870 The keyboard character,
18874 , generates this automatically.
18877 \begin_layout Standard
18878 You can specify what character the
18882 key produces by using the submenu
18888 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18892 \begin_inset Index idx
18895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18896 Document ! Settings
18901 dialog and switching the
18905 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
18906 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
18908 \begin_inset space ~
18914 \begin_layout Labeling
18915 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18927 \begin_inset space ~
18931 \begin_inset space ~
18935 \begin_inset Quotes els
18939 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18953 \begin_inset Quotes els
18957 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18960 quotation marks (as common, e.
18961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18967 \begin_layout Labeling
18968 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18971 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18975 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18979 \begin_inset space ~
18983 \begin_inset space ~
18987 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18991 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18997 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19001 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19005 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19009 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19012 quotation marks (as common, e.
19013 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19019 \begin_layout Labeling
19020 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19023 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19027 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19031 \begin_inset space ~
19035 \begin_inset space ~
19039 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19043 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19049 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19053 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19057 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19061 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19064 quotation marks (as common, e.
19065 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19071 \begin_layout Labeling
19072 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19075 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19079 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19083 \begin_inset space ~
19087 \begin_inset space ~
19091 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19095 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19101 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19105 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19109 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19113 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19116 quotation marks (as common, e.
19117 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19123 \begin_layout Labeling
19124 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19127 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19131 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19135 \begin_inset space ~
19139 \begin_inset space ~
19143 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19147 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19153 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19157 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19161 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19165 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19168 quotation marks (as common, e.
19169 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19172 g., in Switzerland)
19175 \begin_layout Labeling
19176 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19179 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19183 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19187 \begin_inset space ~
19191 \begin_inset space ~
19195 \begin_inset Quotes als
19199 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19205 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19209 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19213 \begin_inset Quotes als
19217 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19220 quotation marks (as common, e.
19221 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19227 \begin_layout Labeling
19228 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19231 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19235 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19239 \begin_inset space ~
19243 \begin_inset space ~
19247 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19251 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19257 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19261 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19265 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19269 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19272 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19275 \begin_layout Labeling
19276 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19279 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19283 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19287 \begin_inset space ~
19291 \begin_inset space ~
19295 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19299 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19305 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19309 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19313 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19317 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19320 quotation marks (as common, e.
19321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19324 g., in Great Britain)
19327 \begin_layout Labeling
19328 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19331 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19335 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19339 \begin_inset space ~
19343 \begin_inset space ~
19347 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19351 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19357 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19361 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19365 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19369 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19372 quotation marks (as common, e.
19373 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19379 \begin_layout Labeling
19380 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19383 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19387 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19391 \begin_inset space ~
19395 \begin_inset space ~
19399 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19403 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19409 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19413 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19417 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19421 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19424 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19429 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19430 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19431 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19432 the inner marks differ).
19440 \begin_layout Labeling
19441 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19444 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19448 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19452 \begin_inset space ~
19456 \begin_inset space ~
19460 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19464 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19470 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19474 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19478 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19482 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19485 quotation marks (as common, e.
19486 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19492 \begin_layout Labeling
19493 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19496 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19500 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19504 \begin_inset space ~
19508 \begin_inset space ~
19512 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19516 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19522 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19526 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19530 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19534 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19537 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19540 \begin_layout Labeling
19541 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19542 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19550 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19556 \begin_inset space ~
19560 \begin_inset space ~
19566 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19574 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19578 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19582 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19586 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19590 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19593 quotation marks (as common, e.
19594 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19602 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19603 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19611 \begin_layout Labeling
19612 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19613 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19621 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19627 \begin_inset space ~
19631 \begin_inset space ~
19637 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19645 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19649 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19653 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19657 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19661 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19664 quotation marks (as common, e.
19665 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19668 g., in North Korea and China)
19672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19673 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19674 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19682 \begin_layout Standard
19683 Inner quotation marks
19687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19688 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
19689 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
19690 case (and specifically the British style shows that
19691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19698 does not necessarily mean
19699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19707 This is why we call them
19708 \begin_inset Quotes els
19712 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19728 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
19730 \begin_inset Quotes els
19734 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19737 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
19740 arg "quote-insert inner"
19745 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19751 \begin_layout Standard
19752 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
19753 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
19754 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
19755 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
19756 If you check the setting
19758 Use dynamic quotation marks
19762 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19763 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19766 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
19767 they appear in a special color).
19768 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
19769 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
19771 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19774 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
19777 \begin_layout Standard
19778 Individual quotation marks (i.
19779 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19782 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
19783 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
19787 \begin_layout Subsection
19789 \begin_inset Index idx
19792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19793 Typography ! Ligatures
19799 \begin_inset Index idx
19802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19831 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19833 name "subsec:Ligatures"
19840 \begin_layout Standard
19841 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
19842 print them as single characters.
19843 These groups are known as
19848 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
19849 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
19851 Here are the standard ligatures:
19854 \begin_layout Itemize
19858 \begin_layout Itemize
19862 \begin_layout Itemize
19866 \begin_layout Itemize
19870 \begin_layout Itemize
19874 \begin_layout Standard
19875 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
19878 \begin_layout Standard
19879 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
19880 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
19881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19888 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
19889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19904 To break a ligature, use
19906 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19907 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19909 \begin_inset space ~
19916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19927 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19944 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19952 \begin_layout Subsection
19954 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
19956 \begin_inset Index idx
19959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19969 \begin_layout Standard
19972 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19973 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
19977 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
19980 \begin_layout Description
19982 The name of the game.
19985 \begin_layout Description
19987 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
19991 \begin_layout Description
19993 The \SpecialChar TeX
19994 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
19998 \begin_layout Description
19999 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
20000 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20004 \begin_layout Standard
20005 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20011 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
20015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20019 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
20020 world to give programs geek version numbers.
20021 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
20022 converges to the number
20023 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
20026 : The actual version is
20027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20035 , the previous one was
20036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20047 \begin_layout Subsection
20049 \begin_inset Index idx
20052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20061 \begin_layout Standard
20062 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
20063 space between two words.
20064 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
20067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20074 for units use the menu
20076 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20077 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20079 \begin_inset space ~
20087 arg "space-insert thin"
20093 \begin_layout Standard
20094 Here is an example to show the differences:
20097 \begin_layout Standard
20098 \begin_inset Tabular
20099 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20100 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20101 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20102 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20109 \begin_inset space ~
20113 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20125 space between number and unit
20132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20141 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20153 half space between number and unit
20166 \begin_layout Subsection
20168 \begin_inset Index idx
20171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20172 Typography ! Widows and orphans
20180 \begin_layout Standard
20181 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
20183 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20184 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
20185 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
20186 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20187 These bits of text became known as
20198 \begin_layout Standard
20199 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20200 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20201 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20202 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20203 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20204 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20205 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20206 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20207 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20208 \begin_inset Newline newline
20216 \begin_inset Newline newline
20224 \begin_inset Newline newline
20227 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20228 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20229 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20231 \begin_inset space ~
20235 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20237 key "latexcompanion"
20243 \begin_inset space ~
20247 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20254 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20255 's page break mechanism.
20258 \begin_layout Chapter
20259 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20260 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20262 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20269 \begin_layout Standard
20270 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20273 \begin_inset space ~
20279 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20282 \begin_layout Section
20284 \begin_inset Index idx
20287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20294 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20303 \begin_layout Standard
20305 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20308 \begin_layout Description
20311 \begin_inset space ~
20314 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20315 \begin_inset Newline newline
20319 \begin_inset Note Note
20322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20323 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20331 \begin_layout Description
20332 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20333 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20334 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20337 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20338 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20340 \begin_inset space ~
20346 \begin_inset Newline newline
20350 \begin_inset Note Comment
20353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20354 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20363 \begin_layout Description
20365 \begin_inset space ~
20368 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20369 set in the document settings under
20371 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20373 \begin_inset space ~
20379 \begin_inset Newline newline
20383 \begin_inset Newline newline
20387 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20396 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20397 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20402 of a comment that appears in the output.
20408 \begin_inset Newline newline
20412 \begin_inset Newline newline
20415 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20418 \begin_layout Standard
20419 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20427 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20431 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20434 \begin_layout Section
20436 \begin_inset Index idx
20439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20446 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20448 name "sec:Footnotes"
20455 \begin_layout Standard
20457 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20460 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20463 or the toolbar button
20466 arg "footnote-insert"
20478 \begin_inset Graphics
20479 filename clipart/footnote.png
20488 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20489 's representation of your footnote.
20499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20518 label, the box will
20522 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20523 Clicking on the box label again will close
20536 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
20537 and click on the footnote
20552 \begin_layout Standard
20553 Here is an example footnote:
20561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20562 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
20570 \begin_layout Standard
20571 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
20572 position where the footnote box is placed.
20573 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
20574 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
20575 according to the document class.
20577 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
20578 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20584 ey are described in the
20587 \begin_inset space ~
20595 \begin_layout Section
20597 \begin_inset Index idx
20600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20609 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
20616 \begin_layout Standard
20617 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
20619 When you insert a margin note via the menu
20621 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20623 \begin_inset space ~
20628 or the toolbar button
20631 arg "marginalnote-insert"
20650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20657 appearing within your text.
20658 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20659 's representation of your margin
20668 \begin_layout Standard
20669 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
20673 \begin_inset Marginal
20676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20678 This is a marginal note.
20686 \begin_layout Standard
20687 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
20688 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
20689 pages, right on odd pages.
20692 \begin_layout Standard
20693 For further information about marginal notes see the section
20696 \begin_inset space ~
20704 \begin_inset space ~
20712 \begin_layout Section
20713 Graphics and Images
20714 \begin_inset Index idx
20717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20724 \begin_inset Index idx
20727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20734 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20736 name "sec:Graphics"
20743 \begin_layout Standard
20744 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
20745 you want and click on the toolbar icon
20748 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
20753 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20757 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
20760 \begin_layout Standard
20761 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
20766 tab allows you to choose your image file.
20767 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
20769 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
20770 \begin_inset space ~
20774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20776 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
20783 \begin_layout Standard
20788 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
20789 of the image in the output.
20790 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
20794 \begin_inset space ~
20798 \begin_inset space ~
20807 \begin_inset space ~
20811 \begin_inset space ~
20815 \begin_inset space ~
20820 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
20821 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
20829 \begin_layout Standard
20833 \begin_inset space ~
20837 \begin_inset space ~
20842 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
20843 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
20845 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
20850 \begin_inset space ~
20855 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
20856 with the image size is printed.
20859 \begin_layout Standard
20860 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
20861 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
20863 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
20866 \begin_layout Standard
20868 \begin_inset Graphics
20869 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
20877 \begin_layout Standard
20878 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
20879 the image into a float, see section
20880 \begin_inset space ~
20884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20886 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
20893 \begin_layout Subsection
20895 \begin_inset Index idx
20898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20905 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20907 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
20914 \begin_layout Standard
20915 You can insert images in any known file format.
20916 But as we explained in section
20917 \begin_inset space ~
20921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20923 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20927 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
20929 therefore uses the program
20933 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
20934 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
20935 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
20936 \begin_inset space ~
20940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20942 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20949 \begin_layout Standard
20950 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
20953 \begin_layout Description
20955 \begin_inset space ~
20958 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
20959 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
20960 Well-known bitmap image formats are
20961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20964 Graphics Interchange Format
20965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20968 (GIF, file extension
20969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20981 \begin_inset Index idx
20984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21016 Portable Network Graphics
21017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21020 (PNG, file extension
21021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21033 \begin_inset Index idx
21036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21068 Joint Photographic Experts Group
21069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21072 (JPG, file extension
21073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21097 \begin_inset Index idx
21100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21131 \begin_layout Description
21133 \begin_inset space ~
21136 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
21138 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
21139 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21140 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21141 \begin_inset Newline newline
21144 Scalable image formats can be
21145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21148 Scalable Vector Graphics
21149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21152 (SVG, file extension
21153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21165 \begin_inset Index idx
21168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21200 Encapsulated PostScript
21201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21204 (EPS, file extension
21205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21217 \begin_inset Index idx
21220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21252 Portable Document Format
21253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21256 (PDF, file extension
21257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21269 \begin_inset Index idx
21272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21287 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21288 result will not be scalable.
21289 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21295 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21303 \begin_layout Standard
21304 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21311 \begin_layout Subsection
21312 Grouping of Image Settings
21313 \begin_inset Index idx
21316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21317 Images ! Settings grouping
21325 \begin_layout Standard
21326 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21328 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21329 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21331 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21332 need to manually change each of them.
21336 \begin_layout Standard
21337 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21340 \begin_inset space ~
21344 \begin_inset space ~
21356 \begin_inset space ~
21360 \begin_inset space ~
21366 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21367 and checking the name of the desired group.
21370 \begin_layout Section
21372 \begin_inset Index idx
21375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21382 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21391 \begin_layout Standard
21392 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21395 arg "tabular-insert"
21400 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21404 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
21405 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
21406 , and you can select a specific (border) style
21409 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21410 from the rest of the table.
21411 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21412 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21414 Here is an example table:
21417 \begin_layout Standard
21419 \begin_inset Tabular
21420 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21421 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21422 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21423 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21424 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21425 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21623 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
21627 \begin_layout Standard
21629 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
21630 This corresponds to the
21631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21638 table style listed in the style selection.
21641 \begin_layout Standard
21643 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
21644 Other available styles include:
21647 \begin_layout Itemize
21649 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
21651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21658 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
21662 \begin_layout Itemize
21664 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
21665 a border-less table with no lines at all,
21668 \begin_layout Itemize
21670 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
21672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21679 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
21680 bold top/bottom lines (see
21691 \begin_layout Standard
21693 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
21694 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
21695 button can be changed in
21697 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21698 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21702 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
21706 \begin_layout Subsection
21710 \begin_layout Standard
21711 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
21714 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
21718 This brings up the table dialog.
21719 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
21720 cursor is placed currently.
21721 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
21722 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
21723 done on all of your selection.
21726 \begin_layout Standard
21727 In addition to the table dialog, the
21730 \begin_inset space ~
21735 helps you in setting table properties.
21736 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
21739 \begin_layout Standard
21743 \begin_inset space ~
21748 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
21749 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
21750 current cell respectively.
21751 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
21753 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
21754 of text, see section
21755 \begin_inset space ~
21759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21761 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
21768 \begin_layout Standard
21769 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
21770 using the check box
21779 This will merge the cells to
21783 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
21784 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
21785 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
21786 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
21787 in the last row without the upper border:
21790 \begin_layout Standard
21792 \begin_inset Tabular
21793 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
21794 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
21795 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21796 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
21797 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21798 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21809 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21818 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21894 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21929 \begin_layout Standard
21930 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21931 -arguments for the table.
21932 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
21933 explained in the chapter
21940 \begin_inset space ~
21946 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
21947 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
21948 but are visible in the output.
21951 \begin_layout Standard
21952 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21960 Most DVI-viewers are
21964 able to display rotations.
21972 \begin_layout Standard
21977 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
21982 adds lines for all cell borders.
21985 \begin_layout Subsection
21987 \begin_inset Index idx
21990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21991 Tables ! Multi-page
21997 \begin_inset Index idx
22000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22009 \begin_layout Standard
22010 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
22013 \begin_inset space ~
22017 \begin_inset space ~
22025 \begin_inset space ~
22030 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
22031 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
22034 \begin_layout Description
22039 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22040 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
22041 Except for the first page, if
22044 \begin_inset space ~
22052 \begin_layout Description
22056 \begin_inset space ~
22061 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22062 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
22065 \begin_layout Description
22070 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22071 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
22072 except for the last page, if
22075 \begin_inset space ~
22083 \begin_layout Description
22087 \begin_inset space ~
22092 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22093 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22096 \begin_layout Description
22097 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
22098 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22100 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22104 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22107 \begin_inset space ~
22115 \begin_layout Standard
22116 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22117 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22118 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22124 In this context, first means first in this order:
22127 \begin_inset space ~
22139 \begin_inset space ~
22144 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
22147 \begin_layout Standard
22149 \begin_inset Tabular
22150 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
22151 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22152 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
22153 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22154 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22155 <row endfirsthead="true">
22156 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22162 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
22167 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22176 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22186 <row endfirsthead="true">
22187 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22198 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22207 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22219 <row endhead="true">
22220 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22231 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22240 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22250 <row endhead="true">
22251 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22262 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22271 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22283 <row endfoot="true">
22284 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22295 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22304 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22335 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23276 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23285 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23294 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23305 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23336 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23367 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23398 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23429 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23460 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23491 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23522 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23553 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23584 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23615 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23646 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23677 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23708 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23739 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23770 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23801 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23832 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23863 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23894 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23925 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23956 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23987 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24018 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24049 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24080 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24111 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24142 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24173 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24204 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24235 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24265 <row endlastfoot="true">
24266 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24277 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24286 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24303 \begin_layout Subsection
24305 \begin_inset Index idx
24308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24315 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24317 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24324 \begin_layout Standard
24325 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24326 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24327 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24328 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24332 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24335 \begin_layout Standard
24336 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24337 for the column in the table dialog.
24338 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24339 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24343 \begin_layout Standard
24345 \begin_inset Tabular
24346 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24347 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24348 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24349 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24350 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24370 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24439 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24495 This is longer now.
24500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24551 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24552 This is longer now.
24557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24583 \begin_layout Standard
24584 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
24585 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
24589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24590 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
24591 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
24597 Selection with the mouse or with
24601 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
24602 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
24603 the selection from outside the table.
24606 \begin_layout Section
24608 \begin_inset Index idx
24611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24618 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24627 \begin_layout Subsection
24631 \begin_layout Standard
24632 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
24633 have a fixed location.
24635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24642 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
24650 \begin_inset space ~
24655 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
24656 too many notes on the current page.
24659 \begin_layout Standard
24660 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
24661 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
24662 and pages without text.
24663 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
24664 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
24665 Floats are therefore numbered.
24666 Referencing is described in section
24667 \begin_inset space ~
24671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24673 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24680 \begin_layout Standard
24681 To insert a float, use the menu
24683 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24687 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
24688 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
24690 After the label you can insert the caption text.
24691 \begin_inset Index idx
24694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24700 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
24701 paragraph within the float.
24702 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
24703 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
24704 left-clicking on the box label.
24705 A closed float box looks like this:
24706 \begin_inset Graphics
24707 filename clipart/float.png
24712 – a gray button with a red label.
24715 \begin_layout Standard
24716 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
24718 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
24721 \begin_layout Subsection
24723 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24725 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24730 \begin_inset Index idx
24733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24734 Floats ! Figure floats
24742 \begin_layout Standard
24744 \begin_inset space ~
24748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24750 reference "fig:A-star-in"
24754 was created using the menu
24756 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24757 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24763 arg "float-insert figure"
24767 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
24770 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24776 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24780 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
24781 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
24783 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24785 \begin_inset space ~
24793 arg "layout-paragraph"
24799 \begin_layout Standard
24800 \begin_inset Float figure
24807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24809 \begin_inset Graphics
24810 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24820 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24823 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24825 name "fig:A-star-in"
24842 \begin_layout Standard
24843 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
24844 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
24846 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24855 ) and refer to it using the menu
24857 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24863 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24867 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
24868 vague references like
24869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24876 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
24877 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
24879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24887 For more about cross-references, see section
24888 \begin_inset space ~
24892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24894 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24901 \begin_layout Standard
24902 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
24903 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
24904 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
24905 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
24906 as described in section
24907 \begin_inset space ~
24911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24913 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
24919 \begin_inset space ~
24923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24925 reference "fig:Two-images"
24929 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
24930 You can also set the images one below the other.
24932 \begin_inset space ~
24936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24938 reference "fig:Undefinable"
24943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24945 reference "fig:Star"
24949 are the subfigures.
24952 \begin_layout Standard
24953 \begin_inset Float figure
24960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24961 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24965 \begin_inset Float figure
24972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24973 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24976 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24978 name "fig:Undefinable"
24990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24991 \begin_inset Graphics
24992 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
25004 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25008 \begin_inset Float figure
25015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25016 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25019 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25034 \begin_inset Graphics
25035 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25047 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25054 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25057 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25059 name "fig:Two-images"
25076 \begin_layout Subsection
25078 \begin_inset Index idx
25081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25082 Floats ! Table floats
25090 \begin_layout Standard
25091 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
25093 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25094 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25097 or the toolbar button
25100 arg "float-insert table"
25104 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
25105 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
25106 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
25108 \begin_inset space ~
25112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25114 reference "tab:Table-float"
25121 \begin_layout Standard
25122 \begin_inset Float table
25129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25130 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25133 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25135 name "tab:Table-float"
25147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25149 \begin_inset Tabular
25150 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
25151 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25152 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25153 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25154 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25281 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25302 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25305 \end{array}\right]$
25313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25326 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25347 \begin_layout Subsection
25349 \begin_inset Index idx
25352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25361 \begin_layout Standard
25363 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25364 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25365 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25367 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25375 \begin_inset space ~
25383 \begin_layout Section
25385 \begin_inset Index idx
25388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25397 \begin_layout Standard
25399 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25401 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25402 \begin_inset space \space{}
25409 \begin_layout Standard
25410 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25411 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25413 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25417 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25418 and its alignment within the page.
25421 \begin_layout Standard
25423 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25433 height_special "totalheight"
25438 backgroundcolor "none"
25441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25444 This is a minipage.
25445 The text is set in an italic style.
25448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25451 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25452 another formatting.
25460 \begin_layout Standard
25461 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25464 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25468 as described in section
25469 \begin_inset space ~
25473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25475 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25480 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25486 \begin_layout Standard
25487 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25497 height_special "totalheight"
25502 backgroundcolor "none"
25505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25506 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25507 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25513 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25517 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25527 height_special "totalheight"
25532 backgroundcolor "none"
25535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25536 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25537 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25545 \begin_layout Standard
25546 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25552 \begin_layout Standard
25553 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
25555 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
25562 \begin_inset space ~
25570 \begin_layout Chapter
25571 Mathematical Formulas
25572 \begin_inset Index idx
25575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25582 \begin_inset Index idx
25585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25614 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25616 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
25623 \begin_layout Standard
25624 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
25629 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
25632 \begin_layout Section
25634 \begin_inset Index idx
25637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25646 \begin_layout Standard
25647 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
25660 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
25662 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
25663 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
25664 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
25666 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25672 \begin_layout Standard
25673 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
25677 \begin_inset space ~
25682 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
25685 \begin_layout Standard
25686 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
25687 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
25690 \begin_layout Standard
25691 This is a line with an inline formula
25692 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
25698 \begin_layout Standard
25699 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
25700 paragraph, like this one:
25701 \begin_inset Formula
25708 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
25711 \begin_layout Standard
25713 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
25715 For example, typing
25716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25729 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
25730 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
25734 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
25737 \begin_inset space ~
25745 \begin_layout Subsection
25746 Navigating in Formulas
25747 \begin_inset Index idx
25750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25759 \begin_layout Standard
25760 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
25761 achieved with the arrow keys.
25763 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
25764 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
25769 will leave a formula construct (a square root
25770 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
25774 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
25778 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25781 \end{array}\right]$
25789 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
25794 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
25795 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
25798 \begin_layout Standard
25803 , printed in this document as
25804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25808 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25815 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
25816 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
25817 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
25822 For example, if you want
25823 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
25831 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25841 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25845 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25850 , since in the latter case only the
25853 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
25858 will be under the square root sign:
25859 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
25865 \begin_layout Standard
25866 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
25868 \begin_inset Formula
25870 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25879 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
25880 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
25883 \begin_layout Subsection
25887 \begin_layout Standard
25888 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
25889 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
25893 and a cursor movement key to select text.
25894 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
25895 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
25896 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
25897 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
25901 \begin_layout Subsection
25902 Exponents and Subscripts
25903 \begin_inset Index idx
25906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25913 \begin_inset Index idx
25916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25925 \begin_layout Standard
25926 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
25929 arg "math-superscript"
25935 arg "math-subscript"
25938 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
25940 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
25943 , type in a formula
25946 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25956 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
25962 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
25966 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
25972 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25978 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
25980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25987 , you have to use an extra
25991 to separate the circumflex and the character.
25992 For example, if you want
25993 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
25999 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26005 Subscripts are similar: To get
26006 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
26012 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26020 \begin_layout Subsection
26022 \begin_inset Index idx
26025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26034 \begin_layout Standard
26035 Create a fraction either with the command
26041 or by using the icon
26044 arg "math-insert \\frac"
26050 \begin_inset space ~
26056 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
26057 The cursor is above the fraction line.
26058 To move it to the bottom, simply press
26063 To move back up, press
26068 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
26069 \begin_inset Formula
26071 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
26074 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26082 \begin_layout Subsection
26084 \begin_inset Index idx
26087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26096 \begin_layout Standard
26097 Roots can be created using the
26100 \begin_inset space ~
26108 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26114 arg "math-insert \\root"
26136 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
26142 always produces a square root.
26145 \begin_layout Subsection
26146 Operators with Limits
26147 \begin_inset Index idx
26150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26157 \begin_inset Index idx
26160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26167 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26169 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26176 \begin_layout Standard
26178 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
26182 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
26185 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
26186 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26187 by entering them as you would enter a super-
26188 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
26189 The sum operator will automatically place its
26190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26197 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
26199 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26203 \begin_inset Formula
26205 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26210 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
26214 \begin_layout Standard
26215 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
26217 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
26218 behind the operator and using the menu
26220 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26221 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26223 \begin_inset space ~
26227 \begin_inset space ~
26241 \begin_layout Standard
26242 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26251 \begin_inset Index idx
26254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26261 \begin_inset Formula
26263 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26268 which will place the
26269 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26281 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26282 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26288 \begin_layout Standard
26289 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26296 Have a look at section
26297 \begin_inset space ~
26301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26303 reference "subsec:Functions"
26307 for an explanation of function macros.
26310 \begin_layout Subsection
26312 \begin_inset Index idx
26315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26324 \begin_layout Standard
26325 Most math symbols can be found in the
26328 \begin_inset space ~
26333 under one of several categories; including
26350 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26354 \begin_layout Standard
26355 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26356 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26357 don't have to use the
26360 \begin_inset space ~
26365 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26367 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26370 \begin_layout Subsection
26372 \begin_inset Index idx
26375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26384 \begin_layout Standard
26385 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26391 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26397 \begin_inset space ~
26405 arg "math-insert \\space"
26409 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26410 For example, the sequence
26415 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26418 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26420 \begin_inset Graphics
26421 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26426 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26427 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26428 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26429 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26430 , because they are negative
26432 Here are two examples:
26435 \begin_layout Standard
26445 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26451 \begin_layout Standard
26461 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26467 \begin_layout Subsection
26469 \begin_inset Index idx
26472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26479 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26481 name "subsec:Functions"
26488 \begin_layout Standard
26492 \begin_inset space ~
26497 contains under the button
26500 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26503 a number of function macros, such as
26504 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26508 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26516 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26523 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26524 avoid confusions, because
26525 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26529 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26535 \begin_layout Standard
26536 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26538 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26542 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26548 \begin_layout Standard
26549 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26550 are placed, as described in section
26551 \begin_inset space ~
26555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26557 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26564 \begin_layout Subsection
26566 \begin_inset Index idx
26569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26578 \begin_layout Standard
26579 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
26581 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
26582 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
26583 commands, for example, to enter
26584 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26587 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
26588 Our example is entered by typing
26593 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26600 \begin_inset space ~
26604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26606 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
26610 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
26613 \begin_layout Standard
26614 \begin_inset Float table
26621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26622 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26627 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
26631 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
26639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26641 \begin_inset Tabular
26642 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
26643 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26644 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26645 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26646 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26730 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26784 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
26794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26838 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
26848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26892 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
26902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26946 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
26956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27000 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
27010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27054 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
27064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27108 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27162 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
27172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27207 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27228 \begin_layout Standard
27229 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
27232 \begin_inset space ~
27240 arg "math-insert \\hat"
27243 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
27247 \begin_layout Section
27248 Brackets and Delimiters
27249 \begin_inset Index idx
27252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27259 \begin_inset Index idx
27262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27269 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27271 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27278 \begin_layout Standard
27279 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27281 For some purposes, using just the keys
27286 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
27287 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
27288 toolbar delimiter icon
27291 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27295 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27296 \begin_inset Formula
27298 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27306 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27307 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27311 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27314 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27320 \begin_inset Formula
27322 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27330 \begin_layout Standard
27331 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27332 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27336 \begin_layout Standard
27337 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27338 left side and right side.
27339 If you use the option
27342 \begin_inset space ~
27347 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27348 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27350 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27355 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27356 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27359 \begin_layout Standard
27360 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27361 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27362 is to go inside the brackets.
27363 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27368 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27369 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27370 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27374 arg "math-delim ( )"
27380 \begin_layout Section
27381 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27382 \begin_inset Index idx
27385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27392 \begin_inset Index idx
27395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27402 \begin_inset Index idx
27405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27406 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27414 \begin_layout Standard
27415 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27419 \begin_inset space ~
27427 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27431 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27432 Here is an example:
27433 \begin_inset Formula
27435 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27444 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27445 \begin_inset space ~
27449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27451 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27456 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27457 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27458 This alignment is set in the box
27463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27512 for every column as default.
27513 For example, the sequence
27514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27525 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
27526 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
27527 corresponds to the relevant column.
27528 The result will look like this:
27529 \begin_inset Formula
27532 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
27533 column & has & has\,right\\
27534 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
27543 \begin_layout Standard
27544 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
27547 arg "newline-insert newline"
27550 while the cursor is in the matrix.
27551 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
27553 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27556 or the math toolbar.
27559 \begin_layout Standard
27560 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
27561 It can be created with the menu
27563 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27564 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27566 \begin_inset space ~
27578 Here is an example:
27579 \begin_inset Formula
27593 \begin_layout Standard
27594 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27597 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
27600 arg "newline-insert newline"
27604 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
27609 arg "newline-insert newline"
27612 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
27613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27620 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
27621 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
27622 A new row is created by every further entry of
27625 arg "newline-insert newline"
27629 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
27630 Here is an example:
27631 \begin_inset Formula
27633 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
27634 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
27639 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
27640 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
27641 \begin_inset Formula
27643 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
27651 \begin_layout Standard
27652 The multi-line formula type described here is called
27659 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
27660 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
27661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27663 reference "eq:asquared"
27668 The other types are described in section
27669 \begin_inset space ~
27673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27675 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27682 \begin_layout Section
27683 Formula Numbering and Referencing
27684 \begin_inset Index idx
27687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27688 Math ! Formula numbering
27694 \begin_inset Index idx
27697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27698 Math ! Referencing formulas
27704 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27706 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27713 \begin_layout Standard
27714 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
27716 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27717 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27719 \begin_inset space ~
27723 \begin_inset space ~
27731 arg "math-number-toggle"
27735 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27736 within parentheses.
27737 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
27738 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
27739 the document class.
27740 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
27741 separated by a dot:
27742 \begin_inset Formula
27752 arg "math-number-toggle"
27755 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
27756 You can only number displayed formulas.
27759 \begin_layout Standard
27760 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
27762 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27763 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27765 \begin_inset space ~
27769 \begin_inset space ~
27777 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
27780 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
27781 \begin_inset Formula
27784 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
27790 To number all lines use the shortcut
27793 arg "math-number-toggle"
27799 \begin_layout Standard
27800 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27803 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
27804 A label is inserted with the menu
27806 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27815 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
27816 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
27817 It is recommended that you use the suggested
27818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27829 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
27830 label type when you have many labels in your document.
27831 We inserted in the following example the label
27832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27839 in the second line:
27840 \begin_inset Formula
27842 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
27843 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
27848 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
27849 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
27850 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
27852 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27854 \begin_inset space ~
27862 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27866 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
27867 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27868 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
27869 as the formula number:
27872 \begin_layout Standard
27873 This is a cross-reference to equation (
27874 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27876 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27883 \begin_layout Standard
27884 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
27885 's cross-reference box are described in section
27886 \begin_inset space ~
27890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27892 reference "sec:Cross-References"
27897 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
27905 \begin_layout Section
27906 User defined math macros
27907 \begin_inset Index idx
27910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27919 \begin_layout Standard
27921 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
27922 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
27923 Math macros are explained in section
27926 \begin_inset space ~
27938 \begin_layout Section
27942 \begin_layout Subsection
27944 \begin_inset Index idx
27947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27956 \begin_layout Standard
27957 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
27958 To set a font in a formula, use the
27961 \begin_inset space ~
27969 arg "math-insert \\font"
27972 , or enter its command, listed in table
27973 \begin_inset space ~
27977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27979 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27986 \begin_layout Standard
27987 \begin_inset Float table
27994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27995 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27998 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28000 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28004 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
28012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28014 \begin_inset Tabular
28015 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
28016 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28017 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28018 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28050 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
28058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28077 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28104 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28137 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
28145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28164 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
28172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28191 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
28199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28225 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
28233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28252 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
28260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28286 \begin_layout Standard
28287 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28295 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
28311 \begin_layout Standard
28312 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
28313 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
28318 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
28319 space when you need a space in the box.
28320 Here is an example where
28321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28332 denotes the set of numbers:
28333 \begin_inset Formula
28335 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28343 \begin_layout Standard
28344 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28345 You can, for example, put a character in
28354 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28358 \begin_inset Newline newline
28361 So it is better not to use this feature.
28364 \begin_layout Standard
28365 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28366 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28370 \begin_inset Newline newline
28373 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28379 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28380 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28386 \begin_layout Standard
28393 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28396 \begin_layout Standard
28397 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28399 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28400 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28402 \begin_inset space ~
28410 \begin_layout Subsection
28412 \begin_inset Index idx
28415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28424 \begin_layout Standard
28425 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28427 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28431 \begin_inset space ~
28435 \begin_inset space ~
28443 \begin_inset space ~
28451 arg "math-insert \\font"
28455 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28456 in black instead of blue.
28457 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
28458 Here is an example:
28459 \begin_inset Formula
28462 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
28463 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
28472 \begin_layout Subsection
28474 \begin_inset Index idx
28477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28486 \begin_layout Standard
28487 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
28488 automatically chosen in most situations.
28506 For most characters,
28514 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
28515 and certain other structures, are set larger in
28520 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
28521 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
28522 thinks are appropriate.
28523 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
28526 arg "math-insert \\style"
28530 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
28531 For example, you can set
28532 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
28535 , which is normally in
28544 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
28548 The four styles are used in the following example:
28551 \begin_layout Standard
28552 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
28556 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
28560 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
28564 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
28570 \begin_layout Standard
28571 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
28572 is set in a particular size with the menu
28574 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28576 \begin_inset space ~
28581 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
28582 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
28583 will be adjusted to correspond.
28584 As an example here is a formula in the font size
28585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28595 \begin_layout Standard
28599 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
28605 \begin_layout Section
28606 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28608 \begin_inset Index idx
28611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28618 \begin_inset Index idx
28621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28630 \begin_layout Standard
28632 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
28633 that are in common use.
28636 \begin_layout Subsection
28637 Enabling AMS-Support
28640 \begin_layout Standard
28641 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
28642 the document by selecting the checkbox
28645 \begin_inset space ~
28649 \begin_inset space ~
28653 \begin_inset space ~
28660 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28664 \begin_inset Index idx
28667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28668 Document ! Settings
28676 \begin_inset space ~
28682 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28683 -errors in formulas,
28684 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
28687 \begin_layout Subsection
28689 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28691 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28696 \begin_inset Index idx
28699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28700 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28708 \begin_layout Standard
28709 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28710 provides a selection of different formula types.
28712 allows you to choose between
28733 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
28734 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28741 , for an explanation of these formula types.
28744 \begin_layout Chapter
28748 \begin_layout Section
28750 \begin_inset Index idx
28753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28760 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28762 name "sec:Cross-References"
28769 \begin_layout Standard
28770 One of \SpecialChar LyX
28771 's strengths is cross-references.
28772 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
28774 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
28775 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
28776 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
28779 \begin_layout Enumerate
28783 \begin_layout Enumerate
28784 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28786 name "enu:Second-item"
28793 \begin_layout Enumerate
28797 \begin_layout Standard
28798 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
28800 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28803 or by pressing the toolbar button
28810 A gray label box like this:
28811 \begin_inset Graphics
28812 filename clipart/label.png
28816 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
28818 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
28820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28853 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
28854 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
28856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28870 \begin_layout Standard
28871 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
28873 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28876 or the toolbar button
28879 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28883 A gray cross-reference box like this:
28884 \begin_inset Graphics
28885 filename clipart/reference.png
28889 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
28891 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
28892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28904 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
28908 \begin_layout Standard
28909 As an alternative to
28911 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28914 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
28919 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
28920 to the actual cursor position via the menu
28922 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28934 \begin_layout Standard
28935 Here is our cross-reference: Item
28936 \begin_inset space ~
28940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28942 reference "enu:Second-item"
28949 \begin_layout Standard
28950 It is recommended to use a protected space
28954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28955 described in section
28956 \begin_inset space ~
28960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28962 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
28971 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
28972 line breaks between them.
28975 \begin_layout Standard
28976 There are eight formats of cross-references:
28979 \begin_layout Description
28980 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
28981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28983 reference "fig:Two-images"
28990 \begin_layout Description
28991 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
28992 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
28994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29004 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29011 \begin_layout Description
29012 <page>: prints the page number: Page
29013 \begin_inset space ~
29017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29018 LatexCommand pageref
29019 reference "fig:Two-images"
29026 \begin_layout Description
29028 \begin_inset space ~
29032 \begin_inset space ~
29035 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
29036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29037 LatexCommand vpageref
29038 reference "fig:Two-images"
29043 \begin_inset Newline newline
29046 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
29047 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
29048 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
29049 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
29050 it prints “on the next page”.
29051 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
29054 \begin_layout Description
29056 \begin_inset space ~
29060 \begin_inset space ~
29064 \begin_inset space ~
29067 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
29068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29070 reference "fig:Two-images"
29075 \begin_inset Newline newline
29078 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
29084 ; otherwise it behaves like
29088 \begin_inset space ~
29092 \begin_inset space ~
29101 \begin_layout Description
29103 \begin_inset space ~
29106 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
29107 \begin_inset Newline newline
29111 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29119 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29129 \begin_inset Index idx
29132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29134 packages ! prettyref
29140 \begin_inset Index idx
29143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29145 packages ! refstyle
29156 \begin_inset Newline newline
29159 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
29160 -package should be used for this feature by setting
29163 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
29167 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29168 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29176 is the default and preferred because
29180 supports only English documents.
29181 The format is specified by using the command
29193 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29194 preamble of the document.
29195 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
29197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29213 \begin_inset Newline newline
29220 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
29225 \begin_inset Newline newline
29236 predefines reference formats for all available types.
29237 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
29239 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
29240 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
29245 , you might do so as follows:
29246 \begin_inset Newline newline
29253 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
29258 \begin_inset Newline newline
29261 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
29262 the package documentation
29263 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29265 key "prettyref,refstyle"
29271 \begin_inset Newline newline
29282 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
29289 \begin_layout Description
29291 \begin_inset space ~
29294 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
29295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29296 LatexCommand nameref
29297 reference "fig:Two-images"
29304 \begin_layout Description
29306 \begin_inset space ~
29309 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29310 label for the reference:
29311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29312 LatexCommand labelonly
29313 reference "fig:Two-images"
29318 \begin_inset Newline newline
29321 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
29322 Code, if you want to issue a command
29323 that \SpecialChar LyX
29329 , then you may want to use the
29332 \begin_inset space ~
29337 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29347 This is the form needed for e.
29348 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29352 \begin_inset space \space{}
29359 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29360 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29362 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29366 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29370 \begin_layout Standard
29371 You can only use the style
29375 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29379 is always possible.
29382 \begin_layout Standard
29383 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29384 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29386 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29387 \begin_inset space ~
29391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29393 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29400 \begin_layout Standard
29401 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29405 \begin_inset space ~
29409 \begin_inset space ~
29414 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29415 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29418 \begin_inset space ~
29423 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29424 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29427 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29433 \begin_layout Standard
29434 You can change labels at any time.
29435 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29436 do not need to think about this.
29439 \begin_layout Standard
29440 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
29442 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
29446 \begin_layout Standard
29447 References are described in detail in the section
29448 \begin_inset space ~
29458 \begin_inset space ~
29466 \begin_layout Section
29467 Table of Contents and other Listings
29468 \begin_inset Index idx
29471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29478 \begin_inset Index idx
29481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29482 Navigating ! Outline
29488 \begin_inset Index idx
29491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29498 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29507 \begin_layout Subsection
29509 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29511 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
29518 \begin_layout Standard
29519 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
29521 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29522 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
29524 \begin_inset space ~
29528 \begin_inset space ~
29534 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
29536 If you click on it, the
29540 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
29541 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
29542 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
29544 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
29546 \begin_inset space ~
29551 that is described in section
29552 \begin_inset space ~
29556 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29558 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
29565 \begin_layout Standard
29566 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
29567 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
29569 \begin_inset space ~
29573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29575 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
29579 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
29581 \begin_inset space ~
29585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29587 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
29591 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
29593 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
29596 \begin_layout Subsection
29597 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
29598 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29600 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
29607 \begin_layout Standard
29608 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
29610 You can insert them via the
29612 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29613 List/Contents/References
29616 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
29619 \begin_layout Section
29620 URLs and Hyperlinks
29621 \begin_inset Index idx
29624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29631 \begin_inset Index idx
29634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29643 \begin_layout Subsection
29645 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29654 \begin_layout Standard
29655 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
29657 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29663 \begin_layout Standard
29664 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
29666 \begin_inset Flex URL
29669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29671 https://www.lyx.org
29679 \begin_layout Standard
29680 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
29686 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
29690 \begin_layout Standard
29691 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29699 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29708 \begin_layout Subsection
29710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29712 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
29719 \begin_layout Standard
29720 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
29722 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29725 or with the toolbar button
29732 The appearing dialog has two fields:
29741 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
29742 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
29743 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29745 name "LyX's homepage"
29746 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29751 , an Email address like this:
29752 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29754 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
29755 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
29761 , or a link to a file.
29766 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29774 \begin_layout Standard
29775 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
29777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29788 to the link target.
29791 \begin_layout Standard
29792 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
29793 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
29794 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
29795 the text style dialog.
29796 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
29800 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29802 name "LyX's homepage"
29803 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29811 \begin_layout Standard
29812 The link text color can be changed, when the option
29816 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
29818 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29819 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29823 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
29825 \begin_inset Newline newline
29833 \begin_inset Newline newline
29840 in the PDF Properties dialog.
29843 \begin_layout Section
29845 \begin_inset Index idx
29848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29855 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29857 name "sec:Appendices"
29864 \begin_layout Standard
29865 Appendices are created with the menu
29867 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29869 \begin_inset space ~
29873 \begin_inset space ~
29879 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
29880 as the appendix part of the book.
29881 This part is marked with a red borderline.
29884 \begin_layout Standard
29885 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
29886 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
29887 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
29888 and the subsection number.
29889 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
29893 \begin_layout Standard
29895 \begin_inset space ~
29899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29901 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
29909 \begin_inset space ~
29913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29915 reference "subsec:Export"
29922 \begin_layout Section
29924 \begin_inset Index idx
29927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29934 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29936 name "sec:Bibliography"
29943 \begin_layout Standard
29944 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
29946 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
29947 \begin_inset space ~
29951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29953 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29960 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
29965 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
29966 \begin_inset space ~
29970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29972 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
29977 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
29978 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
29979 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
29983 using a bibliography database.
29986 \begin_layout Standard
29987 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
29988 use two bibliographies in this document, a
29992 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
29993 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29994 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29995 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
29996 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
29999 \begin_layout Subsection
30000 The Bibliography Environment
30001 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30003 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30010 \begin_layout Standard
30015 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
30017 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
30026 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
30028 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
30029 of ASCII characters only.
30033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30035 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30038 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
30044 \begin_inset Newline newline
30048 \begin_inset Flex URL
30051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30053 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
30063 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30073 , a short form of its title, as the key.
30074 \begin_inset Newline newline
30081 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
30082 the number of the entry.
30087 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30096 \begin_layout Standard
30097 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
30099 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30102 or the toolbar button
30105 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
30109 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
30110 containing the available citations.
30111 Select one or more keys from the list and
30121 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
30122 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
30126 \begin_layout Standard
30127 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
30128 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
30129 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
30131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30141 \begin_layout Standard
30145 Companion Second Edition
30148 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30150 key "latexcompanion"
30158 \begin_layout Standard
30159 The \SpecialChar LyX
30160 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
30161 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30171 \begin_layout Standard
30172 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30179 \begin_inset Index idx
30182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30191 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
30192 the label needs to be given the form
30193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30204 Author A and Author B(Year)
30205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30212 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
30219 \begin_inset space ~
30224 in the document settings
30225 \begin_inset Index idx
30228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30229 Document ! Settings
30236 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
30238 \begin_inset space ~
30244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30246 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
30254 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
30256 Once you have done that, the
30260 dialog has three input fields instead of the
30277 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
30278 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
30279 These two are madatory.
30280 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
30283 Baker, Jones, and Williams
30285 ) and in abrreviated form (
30292 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
30293 add the abbreviated form to
30297 and the full list to the optional
30305 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
30306 If specified like this,
30308 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
30309 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
30312 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30319 is specified, toggling
30320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30327 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
30328 full and abbreviated list
30332 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
30333 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
30334 the citation references.
30335 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
30340 \begin_layout Standard
30341 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
30344 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30346 \begin_inset space ~
30354 arg "layout-paragraph"
30358 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
30361 \begin_layout Subsection
30362 Bibliography databases
30363 \begin_inset Index idx
30366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30367 Bibliography ! Databases
30373 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30375 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30382 \begin_layout Standard
30383 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
30388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30389 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
30391 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
30392 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
30397 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
30399 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
30400 your working field in a database.
30401 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
30402 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
30403 list for that document.
30404 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
30408 \begin_layout Standard
30409 The database is a text file with the file extension
30410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30421 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
30422 The format is explained in
30423 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30430 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30432 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30434 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
30440 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
30441 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
30442 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
30444 \begin_inset Flex URL
30447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30449 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
30457 \begin_layout Standard
30459 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
30460 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30461 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
30463 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
30465 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
30466 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
30467 Those are addressed by
30472 \begin_inset Index idx
30475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30477 packages ! biblatex
30483 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30484 (although it has been significantly
30485 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30495 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30496 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30497 might conversely fail to correctly
30498 handle databases that use specific
30507 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
30511 \begin_layout Standard
30512 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30517 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
30519 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30523 \begin_inset Index idx
30526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30527 Document ! Settings
30539 \begin_inset space ~
30544 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30552 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30553 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30555 \begin_inset Index idx
30558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30559 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30568 \begin_layout Standard
30569 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30572 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30573 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30575 \begin_inset space ~
30581 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
30582 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30590 Add bibliography to TOC
30592 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
30597 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
30598 in the document or just the cited references.
30600 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
30605 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
30606 differ from the encoding of the document.
30611 \begin_layout Standard
30612 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30613 style file is a text file with the file extension
30614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30625 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
30626 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30627 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
30628 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
30630 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
30635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30636 For information on how this is done, have a look at
30637 \begin_inset Newline newline
30641 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30643 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
30653 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30658 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
30662 \begin_layout Standard
30663 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
30666 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30668 \begin_inset Index idx
30671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30672 Bibliography ! Biblatex
30678 \begin_inset Index idx
30681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30683 packages ! biblatex
30691 \begin_layout Standard
30692 Accessing a database via
30696 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30699 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30700 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30702 \begin_inset space ~
30708 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30709 you cannot select a
30714 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
30718 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30721 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
30722 As for the styles, note the following.
30727 \begin_layout Standard
30732 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
30734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30745 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
30746 file (text file with the file extension
30747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30758 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
30759 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
30761 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
30765 \begin_layout Standard
30770 styles are not set in the
30773 \begin_inset space ~
30778 dialog, but in the document settings.
30779 \begin_inset Index idx
30782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30783 Document ! Settings
30788 However, in the dialog in the
30792 field, which is only visible if you use
30796 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
30797 example how its heading will appear).
30798 These options are described in detail in the
30803 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30813 \begin_layout Standard
30814 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
30815 \begin_inset space ~
30819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30821 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30831 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30832 Bibliography Processors
30835 \begin_layout Standard
30836 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
30837 uses a bibliography processor,
30838 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
30839 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
30840 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30842 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
30843 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
30846 \begin_layout Standard
30847 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
30849 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
30850 You can do this on a general level in
30852 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30853 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30854 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30857 or for individual documents in
30859 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30860 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30864 The following variants are available by default:
30867 \begin_layout Description
30868 biber a specific, modern processor
30869 \begin_inset Index idx
30872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30879 developed exclusively for
30883 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30889 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
30894 makes use of; if you use the
30898 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
30905 \begin_layout Description
30906 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
30907 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
30908 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
30912 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
30915 \begin_layout Description
30916 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
30917 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
30921 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
30925 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
30929 features are supported.
30932 \begin_layout Standard
30933 By default (with the
30939 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30940 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30953 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30954 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30955 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30958 ), \SpecialChar LyX
30959 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
30972 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30973 -based bibliography styles).
30974 This should suit most needs.
30977 \begin_layout Standard
30978 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
30979 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
30980 (in \SpecialChar LyX
30985 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30986 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
30987 You can adjust it in
30989 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30990 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30991 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30997 \begin_layout Standard
30998 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
30999 can add below the selection.
31000 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
31001 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31007 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31017 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31021 \begin_layout Standard
31023 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
31025 These are explained in detail in section
31027 Customizing Bibliographies
31031 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31036 Additional Features
31041 \begin_layout Subsection
31043 \begin_inset Index idx
31046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31047 Bibliography ! Citation format
31053 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31055 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
31062 \begin_layout Standard
31063 Many different citation formats are common, e.
31064 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31068 \begin_inset space \space{}
31071 numerical citation (as
31072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31079 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
31080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31087 ) or author-year citations (as
31088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31097 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
31101 \begin_layout Standard
31102 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
31105 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31106 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31110 \begin_inset Index idx
31113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31114 Document ! Settings
31119 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
31125 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
31126 labels, is there to use
31129 \begin_inset space ~
31140 \begin_inset space ~
31145 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
31146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31148 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31155 \begin_layout Standard
31156 With a bibliography database (see
31157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31159 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31166 ) one has in contrary to the
31170 environment full access to the formatting styles.
31171 These style formats are available:
31174 \begin_layout Description
31176 \begin_inset space ~
31179 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31180 -based approached without any additional packages
31181 (simple numeric citations).
31184 \begin_layout Description
31185 Biblatex loads the package
31190 \begin_inset Index idx
31193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31195 packages ! biblatex
31200 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
31202 Biblatex citation style
31206 Biblatex bibliography style
31209 Options to the package
31213 can be entered in the
31220 \begin_layout Description
31222 \begin_inset space ~
31226 \begin_inset space ~
31229 mode) loads the package
31233 with the natbib compatibility mode.
31234 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
31246 behavior very closely.
31251 this option has some additional styles.
31256 styles are also supported by this variant.
31259 \begin_layout Description
31261 \begin_inset space ~
31264 (BibTeX) loads the package
31269 \begin_inset Index idx
31272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31279 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
31282 \begin_layout Description
31284 \begin_inset space ~
31287 (BibTeX) loads the package
31292 \begin_inset Index idx
31295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31302 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
31305 \begin_layout Standard
31314 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
31316 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
31325 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
31327 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
31328 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
31330 Biblatex citation style
31333 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
31339 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
31343 \begin_layout Standard
31344 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
31345 are available in the
31350 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
31351 a name prefix such as
31352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31367 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
31368 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31372 \begin_inset space \space{}
31376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31387 \begin_layout Standard
31388 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
31390 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31394 \begin_inset space \space{}
31397 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
31399 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31403 \begin_inset space \space{}
31407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31419 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31423 \begin_inset space ~
31431 \begin_inset space ~
31437 Here is a simple example where the text
31438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31442 \begin_inset space ~
31446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31449 appears after the reference:
31452 \begin_layout Quote
31454 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31457 key "latexcompanion"
31465 \begin_layout Standard
31466 All styles except for
31470 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
31472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31480 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
31484 \begin_layout Standard
31485 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
31486 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
31487 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
31492 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
31493 multi-citation (so-called
31494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31497 qualified citation lists
31498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31504 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
31509 dialog will display three columns in the field
31516 \begin_inset space ~
31524 \begin_inset space ~
31532 \begin_inset space ~
31538 If you double-click on an item's
31541 \begin_inset space ~
31549 \begin_inset space ~
31554 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
31557 General text before
31563 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
31566 \begin_layout Section
31568 \begin_inset Index idx
31571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31578 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31587 \begin_layout Standard
31588 An index entry is created if you use the menu
31590 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31592 \begin_inset space ~
31597 or the toolbar button
31604 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
31605 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
31606 by \SpecialChar LyX
31607 as the index entry.
31610 \begin_layout Standard
31611 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
31613 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31614 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31616 \begin_inset space ~
31622 A light blue box labeled
31623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31634 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
31635 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
31639 \begin_layout Standard
31640 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
31641 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31642 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
31643 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31645 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31647 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
31655 \begin_layout Subsection
31656 Grouping Index Entries
31657 \begin_inset Index idx
31660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31669 \begin_layout Standard
31670 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
31672 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
31673 lists under the entry
31674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31682 First we create the entry
31683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31691 \begin_inset space ~
31695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31697 reference "subsec:Lists"
31702 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
31703 \begin_inset space ~
31707 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31709 reference "sec:Itemize"
31713 , we insert the command
31716 \begin_layout Standard
31722 \begin_layout Standard
31726 \begin_layout Standard
31732 \begin_layout Standard
31733 for the enumerated list in section
31734 \begin_inset space ~
31738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31740 reference "sec:Enumerate"
31747 \begin_layout Standard
31748 The exclamation mark
31749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31756 marks the grouping levels.
31757 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
31758 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
31759 If we don't have an index entry for
31760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31767 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
31770 \begin_layout Subsection
31772 \begin_inset Index idx
31775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31776 Index ! Page ranges
31784 \begin_layout Standard
31785 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
31787 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
31788 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
31789 an index entry in section
31790 \begin_inset space ~
31794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31796 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
31803 \begin_layout Standard
31806 Paragraph environments|(
31809 \begin_layout Standard
31810 and another entry at the end of section
31811 \begin_inset space ~
31815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31817 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
31824 \begin_layout Standard
31827 Paragraph environments|)
31830 \begin_layout Standard
31832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31855 respectively start and end the index range.
31856 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
31857 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
31858 the pages of the indexed document parts.
31859 An example is the index entry
31860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31863 Document ! Settings
31864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31870 \begin_layout Subsection
31872 \begin_inset Index idx
31875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31876 Index ! Cross referencing
31884 \begin_layout Standard
31885 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
31886 We referred for example in the index entry
31887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31895 \begin_inset space ~
31899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31901 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
31905 ) to the index entry
31906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31913 in the same section using the entry
31916 \begin_layout Standard
31919 GIF|see{Image formats}
31922 \begin_layout Standard
31923 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31925 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
31926 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
31929 \begin_layout Subsection
31931 \begin_inset Index idx
31934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31935 Index ! Entry order
31943 \begin_layout Standard
31944 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
31945 follow the rules for the index order.
31946 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
31951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31952 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
31954 \begin_inset space ~
31958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31960 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31969 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
31970 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
31971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31995 \begin_inset Index idx
31998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31999 Dummy entries ! maïs
32005 \begin_inset Index idx
32008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32009 Dummy entries ! maître
32015 \begin_inset Index idx
32018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32019 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
32024 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
32025 maïs, maison, maître.
32026 To achieve this, we use the command
32029 \begin_layout Standard
32032 previous entry@current entry
32035 \begin_layout Standard
32036 In our case we want to have
32037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32052 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
32055 \begin_layout Standard
32061 \begin_layout Standard
32062 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
32063 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
32065 See the next subsection for an example.
32068 \begin_layout Subsection
32070 \begin_inset Index idx
32073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32074 Index ! Entry layout
32082 \begin_layout Standard
32083 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
32084 \begin_inset Index idx
32087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32090 This is an italic dummy entry
32095 You can also format the page number using the character
32096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32103 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32104 -command without a backslash.
32105 We can write for example
32108 \begin_layout Standard
32111 italic page number:|textit
32114 \begin_layout Standard
32115 to get the page number in italic.
32116 \begin_inset Index idx
32119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32120 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
32125 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
32126 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
32128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32144 \begin_inset space ~
32150 Have a look at section
32151 \begin_inset space ~
32155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32157 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32161 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32165 \begin_layout Standard
32166 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32174 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
32178 to generate the index, see section
32179 \begin_inset space ~
32183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32185 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32194 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
32199 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
32200 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32203 key "latexcompanion"
32216 \begin_layout Standard
32217 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
32219 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
32220 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
32221 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
32222 If so, put the following in the preamble
32225 \begin_layout Standard
32237 \begin_layout Standard
32241 \begin_layout Standard
32247 \begin_layout Standard
32248 in the index entry.
32249 \begin_inset Index idx
32252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32253 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
32258 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
32259 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
32260 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
32263 \begin_layout Standard
32264 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
32265 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
32266 a bold font for all index entries.
32267 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
32279 documentation for details,
32280 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32282 key "makeindex,xindy"
32290 \begin_layout Subsection
32292 \begin_inset Index idx
32295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32302 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32304 name "subsec:Index-Program"
32311 \begin_layout Standard
32312 If the index generation program
32316 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
32317 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
32321 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32322 distribution, is used.
32326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32331 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
32332 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
32333 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
32334 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
32335 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
32345 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
32347 dialog, see section
32348 \begin_inset space ~
32352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32354 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32359 The available options are listed and explained in
32360 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32362 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
32368 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
32372 \begin_layout Standard
32373 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
32374 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
32377 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32378 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32382 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
32383 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
32386 \begin_layout Subsection
32390 \begin_layout Standard
32391 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
32392 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
32393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32400 next to the standard index.
32402 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
32403 that add this feature.
32410 \begin_inset Index idx
32413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32415 packages ! splitidx
32420 package to generate multiple indexes.
32421 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
32426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32427 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
32429 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32437 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32438 style, but it also includes
32439 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
32440 Please consult the package's manual for details.
32448 \begin_layout Standard
32449 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
32450 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
32452 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32453 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32456 and select the option
32458 Use multiple Indexes
32465 already contains the standard index
32466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32474 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
32475 also appear as a heading) to the
32479 input field and press the
32484 The new index now also appears in the list.
32485 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
32486 label color to the new index.
32489 \begin_layout Standard
32490 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
32493 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32494 List/Contents/References
32500 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
32501 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
32502 are additional features:
32505 \begin_layout Itemize
32506 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
32507 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
32510 \begin_layout Itemize
32511 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
32512 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
32517 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
32518 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
32519 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
32520 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
32523 \begin_layout Itemize
32528 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
32529 code in the name of the index.
32532 \begin_layout Section
32533 Nomenclature/Glossary
32534 \begin_inset Index idx
32537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32544 \begin_inset Index idx
32547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32576 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32578 name "sec:Nomenclature"
32585 \begin_layout Standard
32586 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
32587 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
32588 called nomenclature or glossary.
32591 \begin_layout Standard
32592 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32599 \begin_inset Index idx
32602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32610 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32612 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32619 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32623 \begin_layout Standard
32624 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
32625 and then use the menu
32627 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32633 \begin_inset space ~
32638 or the toolbar button
32641 arg "nomencl-insert"
32646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32657 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
32660 \begin_layout Standard
32661 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
32662 The first is the term or
32666 that you wish to define.
32671 of the term or symbol.
32674 \begin_layout Standard
32675 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32683 To use \SpecialChar TeX
32684 code for nomenclature entries the option
32688 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
32696 \begin_layout Subsection
32697 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
32698 \begin_inset Index idx
32701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32702 Nomenclature ! Layout
32710 \begin_layout Standard
32711 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
32715 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
32718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32722 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32730 \begin_inset Newline newline
32738 \begin_inset Newline newline
32744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32751 character starts/ends the formula.
32752 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32753 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
32755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32765 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
32775 \begin_layout Standard
32776 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32777 syntax is given in section
32778 \begin_inset space ~
32782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32784 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32791 \begin_layout Standard
32795 \begin_inset space ~
32800 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
32802 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
32803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32807 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32814 in this document is:
32815 \begin_inset Newline newline
32820 dummy entry for the character
32825 \begin_inset Newline newline
32837 \begin_inset space ~
32847 font use the command
32876 \begin_layout Standard
32877 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
32878 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32882 \begin_inset space \space{}
32886 \begin_inset Newline newline
32902 \begin_inset Newline newline
32905 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
32906 This command will make the font of all symbols
32913 \begin_inset space ~
32921 \begin_layout Standard
32922 If the characters |
32923 \begin_inset space \space{}
32927 \begin_inset space \space{}
32931 \begin_inset space \space{}
32935 \begin_inset space \space{}
32939 \begin_inset space \space{}
32942 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
32943 code they need to be escaped
32944 by adding a quote character in front of them.
32945 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32946 LatexCommand nomenclature
32947 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
32948 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
32956 \begin_layout Subsection
32957 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
32958 \begin_inset Index idx
32961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32962 Nomenclature ! Sort order
32970 \begin_layout Standard
32971 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32972 -code of the symbol
32974 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
32976 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
32979 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32980 LatexCommand nomenclature
32982 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
32990 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32994 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32995 LatexCommand nomenclature
32998 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
33004 They will be sorted by
33005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33031 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33034 will be sorted before the
33038 since the character
33039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33046 is considered in sorting.
33049 \begin_layout Standard
33050 To control the sort order, you can edit the
33053 \begin_inset space ~
33058 field of the nomenclature dialog.
33059 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
33061 For the example given, you can insert
33065 in this field for the
33066 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33073 will be located before
33074 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33080 \begin_layout Standard
33081 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
33086 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33096 \begin_layout Subsection
33097 Nomenclature Options
33098 \begin_inset Index idx
33101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33102 Nomenclature ! Options
33108 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33110 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
33117 \begin_layout Standard
33122 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
33123 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
33126 \begin_layout Description
33127 refeq Appends the phrase
33128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33143 to every nomenclature entry, where
33149 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
33152 \begin_layout Description
33153 refpage Appends the phrase
33154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33169 to every nomenclature entry, where
33175 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
33178 \begin_layout Description
33179 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
33182 \begin_layout Standard
33183 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
33184 class options list in the
33186 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33190 In this document the options
33197 \begin_layout Standard
33198 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33204 \begin_layout Standard
33205 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
33206 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
33211 field in the nomenclature dialog:
33214 \begin_layout Description
33224 \begin_layout Description
33227 nomrefpage Like the
33234 \begin_layout Description
33237 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
33246 \begin_layout Description
33250 \begin_inset space ~
33256 \begin_inset space ~
33261 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
33264 \begin_layout Standard
33266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33273 are automatically translated for most document languages.
33274 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
33278 \begin_layout Standard
33287 \begin_inset Newline newline
33293 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33297 \begin_inset space ~
33309 unskip, see equation
33312 \begin_inset Newline newline
33319 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33320 \begin_inset Newline newline
33326 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33330 \begin_inset space ~
33347 \begin_layout Standard
33348 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
33351 \begin_inset space ~
33356 in the document settings under
33359 \begin_inset space ~
33367 \begin_layout Standard
33375 \begin_inset Newline newline
33379 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33383 \begin_inset space ~
33395 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
33397 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
33398 \begin_inset Newline newline
33405 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33406 \begin_inset Newline newline
33410 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33414 \begin_inset space ~
33426 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
33431 \begin_layout Subsection
33432 Printing the Nomenclature
33433 \begin_inset Index idx
33436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33437 Nomenclature ! Printing
33445 \begin_layout Standard
33446 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
33448 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33449 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33465 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
33466 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
33467 You can choose between these settings:
33470 \begin_layout Description
33471 Default a space of 1
33472 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33478 \begin_layout Description
33480 \begin_inset space ~
33484 \begin_inset space ~
33487 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
33490 \begin_layout Description
33491 Custom custom space
33494 \begin_layout Standard
33495 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
33496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33504 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
33512 For example, in order to change the name to
33516 , add the following line to the preamble:
33519 \begin_layout Standard
33532 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
33535 \begin_layout Standard
33536 When you are using another document language than English, replace
33537 \begin_inset Newline newline
33552 , where *** is the name of the language used.
33555 \begin_layout Subsection
33556 Nomenclature Program
33557 \begin_inset Index idx
33560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33561 Nomenclature ! Program
33567 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33569 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
33576 \begin_layout Standard
33582 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33583 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
33585 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
33590 by adding options, see section
33591 \begin_inset space ~
33595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33597 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33602 The available options are listed and explained in
33603 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33605 key "nomencl,makeindex"
33613 \begin_layout Section
33615 \begin_inset Index idx
33618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33625 \begin_inset Index idx
33628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33629 Document ! Branches
33635 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33637 name "sec:Branches"
33644 \begin_layout Standard
33645 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
33646 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
33647 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
33648 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
33651 \begin_layout Standard
33652 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
33653 allows you to put text into branches.
33654 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
33655 To create a branch, either select the menu
33657 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33658 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
33661 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
33663 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33670 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
33671 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
33672 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
33673 and whether the name of the branch should
33674 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
33675 (see below for an example).
33676 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
33677 to the name of the other) and to add
33678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33686 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33690 \begin_inset space ~
33693 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
33694 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
33697 \begin_layout Standard
33698 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
33699 These boxes are inserted via the menu
33701 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33704 where you can choose a branch.
33705 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
33709 \begin_layout Standard
33710 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
33711 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
33714 \begin_layout Standard
33715 \begin_inset Branch Question
33719 \begin_layout Standard
33724 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
33732 \begin_layout Standard
33733 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33737 \begin_layout Standard
33742 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
33750 \begin_layout Standard
33757 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33758 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33761 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
33762 Consider for example a file
33763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33770 which has the above branches.
33772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33779 is active, the PDF export file would be called
33780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33803 branch were inactive,
33804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33819 branch was active, likewise
33820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33835 branch was active, and
33836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33839 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
33840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33843 if both branches were active.
33844 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
33845 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33851 \begin_layout Standard
33852 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
33858 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
33859 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
33863 \begin_inset space ~
33871 \begin_layout Standard
33872 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33876 \begin_layout Standard
33882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33889 branch is deactivated.
33895 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33901 \begin_layout Standard
33902 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
33903 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
33904 definitions for each branch.
33905 For example you can define for the question branch
33909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33910 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33911 -syntax, see section
33912 \begin_inset space ~
33916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33918 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33930 \begin_layout Standard
33940 \begin_layout Standard
33950 \begin_layout Standard
33951 and for the answer branch
33954 \begin_layout Standard
33964 \begin_layout Standard
33974 \begin_layout Standard
33975 \begin_inset Branch Question
33979 \begin_layout Standard
33983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34011 \begin_layout Standard
34012 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34016 \begin_layout Standard
34020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34048 \begin_layout Standard
34049 Now it is possible to use the
34053 question{\SpecialChar ldots
34060 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
34063 commands to obtain conditional output.
34064 Here is an example formula where only the
34071 \begin_inset Formula
34073 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
34081 \begin_layout Standard
34082 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
34090 \begin_layout Standard
34091 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
34093 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34097 \begin_inset space \space{}
34100 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
34102 For this advanced usage, see the
34108 Flex insets and InsetLayout
34113 \begin_layout Section
34115 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34117 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
34122 \begin_inset Index idx
34125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34134 \begin_layout Standard
34137 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34138 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34141 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
34143 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34149 \begin_inset Index idx
34152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34154 packages ! hyperref
34159 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
34160 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
34161 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
34162 part of the document.
34166 \begin_layout Standard
34167 The header information in the dialog tab
34171 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
34172 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
34173 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
34174 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
34178 \begin_inset space ~
34182 \begin_inset space ~
34187 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
34188 tries to extract the header information from your document title
34189 and author entries.
34193 \begin_inset space ~
34197 \begin_inset space ~
34201 \begin_inset space ~
34206 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
34209 \begin_layout Standard
34210 You can specify in the dialog tab
34214 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
34219 \begin_inset space ~
34223 \begin_inset space ~
34227 \begin_inset space ~
34232 option allows long links to be split;
34235 \begin_inset space ~
34239 \begin_inset space ~
34243 \begin_inset space ~
34251 \begin_inset space ~
34256 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
34259 \begin_inset space ~
34264 colors the different links.
34265 The default colors are:
34268 \begin_layout Labeling
34269 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34274 for hyperlinks and URLs
34277 \begin_layout Labeling
34278 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34286 \begin_layout Labeling
34287 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34295 \begin_layout Standard
34296 but you can change these in the field
34301 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
34304 \begin_layout Standard
34307 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
34310 \begin_layout Standard
34315 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
34316 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
34317 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
34320 \begin_layout Standard
34325 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
34326 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
34327 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
34337 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
34338 when opening the PDF.
34340 \begin_inset space ~
34343 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
34344 \begin_inset space ~
34347 1 will only display the sections.
34350 \begin_layout Standard
34351 PDF properties are also used in this document.
34352 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
34358 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
34359 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34369 \begin_layout Section
34371 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34373 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34375 name "sec:TeX-Code"
34382 \begin_layout Subsection
34385 \begin_inset Index idx
34388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34396 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34398 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
34405 \begin_layout Standard
34406 As \SpecialChar LyX
34407 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
34408 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
34409 commands and constructs,
34412 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
34413 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
34414 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
34415 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34416 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
34417 cannot support all packages and
34421 \begin_layout Standard
34422 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
34423 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
34424 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
34428 Code box is created by the menu
34430 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34432 \begin_inset space ~
34437 or by the toolbar button
34450 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
34458 \begin_layout Standard
34459 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
34461 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
34463 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
34467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34468 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
34473 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34480 , you can write the command part
34486 in a \SpecialChar TeX
34487 Code box before the word and the closing brace
34491 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
34492 Code box behind the word.
34493 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
34494 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
34498 \begin_layout Standard
34499 \begin_inset Graphics
34500 filename clipart/ERT.png
34508 \begin_layout Standard
34512 \begin_layout Standard
34513 This is a line with a
34517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34540 \begin_layout Standard
34541 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34549 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34550 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
34551 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
34552 know that the command is finished.
34560 \begin_layout Subsection
34561 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34563 \begin_inset Argument 1
34566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34567 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34574 \begin_inset Index idx
34577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34585 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34587 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34594 \begin_layout Standard
34595 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
34596 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34597 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
34598 uses in the background.
34599 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
34600 is based on commands, you can
34601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34609 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
34610 any time if you know the right commands.
34611 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
34612 is the end of the day.
34613 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
34614 all caption labels bold.
34615 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
34617 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
34621 \begin_layout Standard
34622 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
34624 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34626 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34629 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34639 \begin_layout Standard
34640 As result you find that the package
34645 \begin_inset Index idx
34648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34656 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
34658 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34661 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34665 \begin_inset space ~
34673 \begin_layout Standard
34678 usepackage[options]{package name}
34681 \begin_layout Standard
34682 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
34683 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
34684 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
34685 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
34688 \begin_layout Standard
34689 In your case the package name is
34694 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
34699 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
34700 So you add the command
34703 \begin_layout Standard
34708 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
34711 \begin_layout Standard
34712 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
34716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34717 For more commands provided by the
34721 package, have a look at its documentation,
34722 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34737 \begin_layout Standard
34738 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
34740 For example if you use a
34744 class, you don't need the package
34748 , you can instead write
34751 \begin_layout Standard
34756 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
34761 \begin_layout Standard
34762 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
34763 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
34764 documentation of the document class you want to use.
34771 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
34774 \begin_layout Standard
34775 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
34776 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
34778 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34779 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
34780 Code box as described in the previous
34784 \begin_layout Standard
34785 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
34786 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34789 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34791 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
34799 \begin_layout Standard
34800 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34806 \begin_layout Standard
34810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34820 \begin_inset Note Note
34823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34824 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
34832 \begin_layout Left Header
34833 \begin_inset Argument 1
34836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34856 \begin_inset Note Note
34859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34860 defines the header line as described below
34868 \begin_layout Center Header
34869 \begin_inset Argument 1
34872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34881 \begin_layout Right Header
34882 \begin_inset Argument 1
34885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34906 \begin_layout Left Footer
34907 \begin_inset Argument 1
34910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34931 \begin_layout Center Footer
34932 \begin_inset Argument 1
34935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34947 \begin_inset Newline newline
34951 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34957 \begin_layout Right Footer
34958 \begin_inset Argument 1
34961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34983 \begin_layout Section
34984 Customized Page Headers and Footers
34985 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34987 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
34992 \begin_inset Index idx
34995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34996 Document ! Header/Footer line
35002 \begin_inset Index idx
35005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35014 \begin_layout Standard
35015 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
35019 \begin_inset space ~
35030 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35036 \begin_inset space ~
35042 As a second step add in the menu
35044 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35045 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35054 Custom Header/Footerlines
35057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35061 This module offers the following 6
35062 \begin_inset space ~
35068 \begin_layout Description
35070 \begin_inset space ~
35074 \begin_inset space ~
35078 \begin_inset space ~
35082 \begin_inset space ~
35086 \begin_inset space ~
35092 \begin_layout Description
35094 \begin_inset space ~
35098 \begin_inset space ~
35102 \begin_inset space ~
35106 \begin_inset space ~
35110 \begin_inset space ~
35116 \begin_layout Standard
35117 for the different positions in the header/footer.
35118 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
35121 \begin_layout Standard
35122 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
35123 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
35125 \begin_inset space ~
35129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35131 reference "fig:Page-layout"
35135 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
35138 \begin_layout Standard
35139 \begin_inset Float figure
35146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35149 \begin_inset Tabular
35150 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
35151 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
35152 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35153 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35154 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35156 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
35168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35174 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35185 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35203 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35214 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
35217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35218 The normal text on the page goes here.
35219 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
35221 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
35222 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
35227 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35236 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35247 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35265 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35276 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
35288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35294 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35312 \begin_inset Caption Standard
35314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35315 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35317 name "fig:Page-layout"
35321 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
35334 \begin_layout Standard
35335 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35343 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
35347 \begin_inset space ~
35352 is set to “Default”.
35353 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
35362 \begin_layout Subsection
35366 \begin_layout Standard
35367 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
35368 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
35369 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
35370 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
35372 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
35374 Defining the footer line works similarly.
35377 \begin_layout Standard
35378 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
35379 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
35383 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35385 \begin_inset space ~
35393 \begin_layout Description
35396 thepage prints the current page number
35399 \begin_layout Description
35402 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
35405 \begin_layout Description
35408 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
35411 \begin_layout Description
35414 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
35415 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
35418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35422 \begin_inset Quotes prd
35425 because it usually goes in a left header.
35428 \begin_layout Description
35431 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
35432 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
35434 It is normally used in the right header.
35437 \begin_layout Subsection
35438 Default header/footer
35441 \begin_layout Standard
35442 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
35443 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
35444 footer has the page number.
35445 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
35446 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
35447 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
35450 \begin_inset space ~
35458 \begin_layout Subsection
35462 \begin_layout Standard
35463 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
35464 Some pages are different.
35465 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
35466 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
35467 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
35468 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
35469 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
35472 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35473 Header and footer decoration line
35476 \begin_layout Standard
35477 By default, you get a 0.4
35478 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35481 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
35482 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
35494 in the following way:
35497 \begin_layout Standard
35504 headrulewidth}{thickness}
35507 \begin_layout Standard
35508 where thickness is a size in standard units like
35521 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
35522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35528 \begin_layout Standard
35529 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35531 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
35532 \begin_inset space ~
35536 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35546 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35547 Several header/footer lines
35550 \begin_layout Standard
35551 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
35552 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
35553 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
35555 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35570 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35571 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35573 \begin_inset space ~
35581 \begin_layout Standard
35588 headheight}{height}
35591 \begin_layout Standard
35596 is a size in standard units (e.
35597 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35601 \begin_inset space \space{}
35609 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
35610 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
35611 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35612 logfile with the menu
35614 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35616 \begin_inset space ~
35624 \begin_inset space ~
35629 to see if you can find a warning about the package
35634 \begin_inset Index idx
35637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35639 packages ! fancyhdr
35645 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
35646 for your header/footer.
35649 \begin_layout Subsection
35653 \begin_layout Standard
35654 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
35655 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
35656 This example consists of the following definition:
35659 \begin_layout Description
35661 \begin_inset space ~
35670 , empty optional argument
35673 \begin_layout Description
35675 \begin_inset space ~
35678 Header empty, empty optional argument
35681 \begin_layout Description
35683 \begin_inset space ~
35692 in the optional argument
35695 \begin_layout Description
35697 \begin_inset space ~
35706 in the optional argument
35709 \begin_layout Description
35711 \begin_inset space ~
35724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35728 \begin_inset Newline newline
35732 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35739 in the optional argument
35742 \begin_layout Description
35744 \begin_inset space ~
35753 , empty optional argument
35756 \begin_layout Description
35759 headrulewidth set to 2
35760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35766 \begin_layout Standard
35767 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
35768 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
35774 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35784 \begin_layout Standard
35785 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35791 \begin_layout Standard
35795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35799 pagestyle{headings}
35805 \begin_inset Note Note
35808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35809 switches back to page style with the default headings
35817 \begin_layout Section
35818 Previewing Snippets of your Document
35819 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35821 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35826 \begin_inset Index idx
35829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35836 \begin_inset Index idx
35839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35848 \begin_layout Standard
35850 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
35851 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
35852 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
35855 \begin_layout Subsection
35859 \begin_layout Standard
35860 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35866 \begin_inset Index idx
35869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35871 packages ! preview-latex
35876 (on some systems named simply
35881 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
35883 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35890 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35892 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
35900 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
35901 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35902 -package are automatically
35903 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
35907 \begin_layout Subsection
35911 \begin_layout Standard
35912 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
35913 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35915 activate the option
35918 \begin_inset space ~
35925 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35931 \begin_inset space ~
35935 \begin_inset space ~
35938 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
35945 \begin_inset space ~
35958 \begin_inset space ~
35963 is the multiplication factor for the size.
35966 \begin_layout Standard
35967 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35972 \begin_inset space ~
35980 \begin_inset space ~
35988 \begin_layout Standard
35989 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
35990 and when you finish
35994 \begin_layout Standard
35995 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36003 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
36004 generated by activating the option
36007 \begin_inset space ~
36013 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
36021 \begin_layout Subsection
36022 Selected document parts
36025 \begin_layout Standard
36026 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
36027 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
36028 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
36029 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36031 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
36033 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36037 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
36038 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
36039 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
36042 \begin_layout Standard
36043 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36050 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36062 is explained in section
36064 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
36069 \begin_inset space ~
36079 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
36080 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36081 the final rotated boxes,
36082 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
36083 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
36085 Here is the result:
36088 \begin_layout Standard
36089 \begin_inset Preview
36091 \begin_layout Standard
36096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36100 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
36106 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
36116 height_special "totalheight"
36121 backgroundcolor "none"
36124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36149 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
36155 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
36162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36177 \begin_layout Standard
36178 Previewing works also for colors.
36179 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36198 is explained in section
36205 \begin_inset space ~
36218 \begin_layout Standard
36219 \begin_inset Preview
36221 \begin_layout Standard
36225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36244 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
36249 This is text within a colored, framed box.
36253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36268 \begin_layout Standard
36269 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
36275 \begin_layout Standard
36276 If \SpecialChar LyX
36277 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
36278 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
36279 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
36280 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36281 packages in your document preamble that are required by
36282 the \SpecialChar TeX
36284 If \SpecialChar LyX
36285 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
36286 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
36288 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
36289 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
36290 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
36293 \begin_layout Subsection
36298 \begin_layout Standard
36299 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36300 source of the whole document or parts of it.
36303 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
36305 \begin_inset space ~
36310 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36312 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
36314 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
36315 's main window, then only this selection
36316 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
36317 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
36318 the source view window.
36323 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
36324 ; but note that if you have
36325 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
36327 not just the one which is open at the time.
36330 \begin_layout Section
36331 Advanced Find and Replace
36332 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36334 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
36339 \begin_inset Index idx
36342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36349 \begin_inset Index idx
36352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36361 \begin_layout Subsection
36365 \begin_layout Standard
36366 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
36367 allows for searching of complex,
36368 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
36370 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
36371 The key-features are:
36374 \begin_layout Itemize
36375 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
36376 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
36377 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
36381 \begin_layout Itemize
36382 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
36383 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
36384 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
36385 a section heading will only be found within section headings
36388 \begin_layout Itemize
36389 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
36390 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
36391 outside of mathematics environments
36394 \begin_layout Itemize
36395 Search may be widened to a specific
36400 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36404 \begin_inset space ~
36407 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
36408 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
36415 \begin_layout Itemize
36416 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
36417 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
36418 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36422 \begin_inset space ~
36425 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
36428 \begin_layout Subsection
36432 \begin_layout Standard
36433 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
36435 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
36448 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
36451 ) or the toolbar button
36454 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
36460 Advanced Find and Replace
36465 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36469 \begin_layout Standard
36475 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
36479 \begin_inset space ~
36484 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
36487 arg "paragraph-break"
36491 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
36492 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
36496 arg "paragraph-break"
36499 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
36503 searches backwards.
36506 \begin_layout Standard
36510 \begin_inset space ~
36515 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
36524 \begin_inset space ~
36529 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
36532 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36533 Searching for mathematics
36536 \begin_layout Standard
36537 Mathematical formulas, such as
36538 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
36541 or something more complex like
36542 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
36545 , may be searched for by typing them in the
36550 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
36551 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
36552 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
36553 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
36559 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36563 \begin_layout Standard
36564 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
36565 This is done by switching to the
36569 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
36574 This way, entering in the
36581 \begin_layout Itemize
36582 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
36583 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
36586 \begin_layout Itemize
36587 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
36588 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
36591 \begin_layout Itemize
36592 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
36593 of it only within section headings.
36594 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
36595 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
36599 \begin_layout Itemize
36600 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
36601 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
36604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36608 \begin_layout Standard
36609 The entries made in the
36613 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
36616 \begin_inset space ~
36622 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
36626 button or alternatively press
36629 arg "paragraph-break"
36636 while the cursor is in the
36639 \begin_inset space ~
36647 \begin_layout Standard
36648 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
36650 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
36654 \begin_layout Itemize
36655 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
36656 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
36657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36664 with its typewriter version
36665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36679 \begin_layout Itemize
36680 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
36682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36686 \begin_inset Formula $R$
36690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36698 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
36702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36705 (you may want to enable the
36708 \begin_inset space ~
36716 \begin_inset space ~
36721 options and disable the
36729 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
36730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36737 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
36738 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
36742 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
36745 , or occurrences of
36746 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
36750 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
36756 \begin_layout Subsection
36760 \begin_layout Standard
36761 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
36765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36766 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
36768 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36770 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
36780 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
36786 This is done with the context menu
36788 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36789 Insert Regular Expression
36791 while the cursor is in the
36796 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
36797 expression matching rules
36801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36802 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
36805 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36809 \begin_inset space ~
36812 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
36813 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
36819 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
36820 same text in the document.
36821 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
36822 Examples of using such a feature may be:
36825 \begin_layout Enumerate
36826 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
36831 editor the fraction
36832 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
36836 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36839 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
36840 fractions with the given denominator.
36843 \begin_layout Enumerate
36844 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
36856 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36861 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
36862 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
36863 Also, by inserting a
36864 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36867 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
36868 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
36871 \begin_layout Standard
36872 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
36873 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
36874 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36877 , and referring back to them through
36878 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36882 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
36886 For example, try searching with the regexp
36887 \begin_inset Newline newline
36890 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
36893 \begin_inset Newline newline
36896 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
36899 \begin_layout Standard
36900 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
36903 \begin_layout Standard
36904 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36912 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
36913 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
36914 sub-expressions is absolute.
36916 \begin_inset space ~
36920 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36923 always refers to the first occurrence of
36924 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36927 in all entered regexps.
36935 \begin_layout Section
36937 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36939 name "sec:Spellchecking"
36944 \begin_inset Index idx
36947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36956 \begin_layout Standard
36958 has a built-in spell checker.
36961 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36968 key or the toolbar button
36971 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
36974 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
36975 beginning of the currently selected text.
36976 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
36977 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
36978 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
36979 scrolled so that it is visible.
36980 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
36981 n, if any could be found.
36982 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
36986 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
36987 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
36990 \begin_layout Standard
36991 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
36994 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36998 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
36999 a different one at the top of the dialog.
37001 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
37002 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
37005 \begin_inset space ~
37013 arg "dialog-show character"
37016 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
37018 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
37021 \begin_layout Standard
37022 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37023 can be downloaded from here:
37024 \begin_inset Newline newline
37028 \begin_inset Flex URL
37031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37033 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
37039 \begin_inset Newline newline
37043 \begin_inset space ~
37046 files for each language.
37047 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
37048 \begin_inset space ~
37051 files into \SpecialChar LyX
37052 's installation subfolder
37060 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37062 \begin_inset Newline newline
37065 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
37066 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
37067 but in most cases these are
37083 is the language code.
37086 \begin_layout Subsection
37090 \begin_layout Standard
37093 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37094 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37096 \begin_inset space ~
37099 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37102 you can set the following things:
37105 \begin_layout Description
37107 \begin_inset space ~
37110 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
37111 should use for spell checking.
37112 Depending on your platform,
37122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37123 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
37124 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
37139 \begin_inset space ~
37142 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
37145 \begin_layout Description
37147 \begin_inset space ~
37150 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
37151 will always use the given language
37152 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
37155 \begin_layout Description
37157 \begin_inset space ~
37160 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
37162 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37166 \begin_inset space \space{}
37170 This should normally not be needed.
37173 \begin_layout Description
37175 \begin_inset space ~
37179 \begin_inset space ~
37182 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
37184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37194 \begin_layout Description
37196 \begin_inset space ~
37199 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
37200 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
37201 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
37202 appear in a context menu.
37203 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
37207 \begin_layout Description
37209 \begin_inset space ~
37213 \begin_inset space ~
37217 \begin_inset space ~
37220 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
37224 \begin_layout Section
37226 \begin_inset Index idx
37229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37236 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37238 name "sec:Thesaurus"
37245 \begin_layout Standard
37247 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
37248 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
37257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37258 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37260 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
37270 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
37272 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
37273 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
37274 which are available for many languages.
37277 \begin_layout Standard
37278 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
37279 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
37283 \begin_layout Subsection
37284 Setting up the thesaurus
37287 \begin_layout Standard
37296 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
37300 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
37305 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
37307 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37311 \begin_inset space ~
37319 For instance, the US English files are named:
37322 \begin_layout Itemize
37326 \begin_layout Itemize
37330 \begin_layout Standard
37339 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
37340 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
37343 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37344 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37345 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37347 \begin_inset space ~
37352 ) to the path where they are installed.
37356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37357 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
37358 ies, typical locations are
37364 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
37368 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
37372 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
37375 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
37381 LibreOffice-<Version>
37388 On the Mac, the default location is
37390 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
37391 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37392 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
37393 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
37394 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37395 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37403 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
37404 during the \SpecialChar LyX
37405 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
37409 \begin_layout Standard
37410 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
37411 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
37413 \begin_inset Newline newline
37417 \begin_inset Flex URL
37420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37422 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
37430 \begin_layout Standard
37431 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
37432 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
37434 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37435 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37436 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37438 \begin_inset space ~
37443 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37445 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
37446 and point \SpecialChar LyX
37450 \begin_layout Standard
37451 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
37453 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37456 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
37462 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
37465 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
37466 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
37468 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37474 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37475 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37476 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37478 \begin_inset space ~
37483 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
37486 \begin_layout Subsection
37487 Using the thesaurus
37490 \begin_layout Standard
37491 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
37493 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37496 or the toolbar button
37499 arg "thesaurus-entry"
37502 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
37504 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
37506 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
37507 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
37508 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
37517 ), related terms (such as
37520 \begin_inset space ~
37529 ), compounds (such as
37532 \begin_inset space ~
37541 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
37550 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
37553 \begin_layout Standard
37554 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
37555 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
37559 \begin_layout Standard
37560 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
37561 the dictionary, such as the above
37565 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
37566 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37570 \begin_inset space \space{}
37573 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
37574 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
37575 For example, looking up the word form
37579 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
37584 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
37585 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37589 \begin_inset space \space{}
37600 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
37601 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
37602 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
37605 \begin_layout Section
37607 \begin_inset Index idx
37610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37617 \begin_inset Index idx
37620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37621 Document ! Change Tracking
37627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37629 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
37636 \begin_layout Standard
37637 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
37638 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
37639 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
37640 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
37642 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37644 \begin_inset space ~
37647 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37649 \begin_inset space ~
37657 \begin_layout Standard
37658 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
37672 The color depends on the author that made the change.
37673 You can change the color in
37675 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37676 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37678 \begin_inset space ~
37682 \begin_inset space ~
37687 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37693 \begin_inset Index idx
37696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37697 Color ! Change tracking
37702 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
37703 's status bar when the
37704 cursor is in changed text.
37705 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
37708 arg "changes-merge"
37714 \begin_layout Standard
37715 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
37717 \begin_inset Index idx
37720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37729 \begin_layout Standard
37730 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37736 \begin_layout Standard
37737 \begin_inset Graphics
37738 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
37746 \begin_layout Standard
37747 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37753 \begin_layout Standard
37754 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
37757 \begin_layout Standard
37758 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37764 \begin_layout Standard
37765 \begin_inset Tabular
37766 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
37767 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37768 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37769 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37770 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37779 arg "changes-track"
37787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37793 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37795 \begin_inset space ~
37798 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37800 \begin_inset space ~
37809 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37818 arg "changes-output"
37826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37832 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37834 \begin_inset space ~
37837 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37839 \begin_inset space ~
37843 \begin_inset space ~
37847 \begin_inset space ~
37856 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37877 Jumps to the next change
37883 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37892 arg "change-accept"
37900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37906 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37908 \begin_inset space ~
37911 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37913 \begin_inset space ~
37922 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37931 arg "change-reject"
37939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37945 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37947 \begin_inset space ~
37950 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37952 \begin_inset space ~
37961 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37970 arg "changes-merge"
37978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37984 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37986 \begin_inset space ~
37989 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37991 \begin_inset space ~
38000 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38009 arg "all-changes-accept"
38017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38023 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38025 \begin_inset space ~
38028 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38030 \begin_inset space ~
38034 \begin_inset space ~
38043 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38052 arg "all-changes-reject"
38060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38066 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38068 \begin_inset space ~
38071 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38073 \begin_inset space ~
38077 \begin_inset space ~
38086 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38109 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38110 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
38112 \begin_inset space ~
38121 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38144 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38146 \begin_inset space ~
38162 \begin_layout Standard
38163 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38169 \begin_layout Standard
38170 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
38190 \begin_layout Standard
38191 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
38192 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
38193 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
38194 the next change after the current cursor position.
38195 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
38196 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
38197 step to the next change.
38198 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
38201 \begin_layout Standard
38202 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
38203 to describe a change.
38206 \begin_layout Standard
38207 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38213 \begin_inset Index idx
38216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38224 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
38226 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38233 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38237 \begin_layout Section
38238 Comparison of Documents
38239 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38241 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38246 \begin_inset Index idx
38249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38250 Comparison of documents
38258 \begin_layout Standard
38259 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
38262 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38266 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
38267 file with change tracking enabled showing the
38269 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
38271 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
38275 \begin_inset space ~
38279 \begin_inset space ~
38283 \begin_inset space ~
38292 \begin_inset space ~
38296 \begin_inset space ~
38300 \begin_inset space ~
38304 \begin_inset space ~
38308 \begin_inset space ~
38312 \begin_inset space ~
38317 enables the change tracking option
38320 \begin_inset space ~
38324 \begin_inset space ~
38328 \begin_inset space ~
38333 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
38336 \begin_layout Section
38337 International Support
38338 \begin_inset Index idx
38341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38342 International support
38350 \begin_layout Standard
38351 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
38352 with any language you want.
38353 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
38354 up \SpecialChar LyX
38356 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38358 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
38366 \begin_layout Standard
38367 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
38368 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
38369 \begin_inset space ~
38373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38375 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
38382 \begin_layout Subsection
38384 \begin_inset Index idx
38387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38394 \begin_inset Index idx
38397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38398 Document ! Settings
38404 \begin_inset Index idx
38407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38408 Document ! Language
38416 \begin_layout Standard
38419 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38420 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38423 dialog lets you set
38425 the language, the quote style and character encoding
38430 \begin_layout Standard
38435 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38440 \begin_inset space ~
38445 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
38446 For details about the different encoding options see section
38447 \begin_inset space ~
38451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38453 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
38460 \begin_layout Subsection
38461 Keyboard mapping configuration
38462 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38464 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
38471 \begin_layout Standard
38472 If you have for example a U.
38473 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38476 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
38477 can use an alternate keymap.
38478 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
38483 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38484 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38485 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
38488 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
38489 \begin_inset space ~
38493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38495 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
38500 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
38501 which one you want to use.
38504 \begin_layout Standard
38505 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
38506 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
38507 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
38508 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38511 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
38512 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
38513 one to support the characters you want.
38514 This and many other customizations are explained in the
38521 \begin_layout Chapter
38524 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38526 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
38533 \begin_layout Standard
38534 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
38535 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
38536 topic inside the user's guide.
38539 \begin_layout Section
38541 \begin_inset Index idx
38544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38553 \begin_layout Standard
38558 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
38561 \begin_layout Subsection
38565 \begin_layout Standard
38566 Creates a new document.
38569 \begin_layout Subsection
38573 \begin_layout Standard
38574 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
38575 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
38576 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
38578 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
38579 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
38585 \begin_layout Subsection
38589 \begin_layout Standard
38593 \begin_layout Subsection
38597 \begin_layout Standard
38598 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
38599 Click there on a file to open it.
38602 \begin_layout Subsection
38604 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
38608 \begin_layout Standard
38610 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
38611 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
38615 \begin_layout Subsection
38619 \begin_layout Standard
38620 Closes the current document.
38623 \begin_layout Subsection
38627 \begin_layout Standard
38628 Closes all opened documents.
38631 \begin_layout Subsection
38635 \begin_layout Standard
38636 Saves the actual document.
38639 \begin_layout Subsection
38643 \begin_layout Standard
38644 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
38645 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
38649 \begin_layout Subsection
38651 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
38655 \begin_layout Standard
38657 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
38658 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
38664 \begin_layout Subsection
38668 \begin_layout Standard
38669 Saves all opened documents.
38672 \begin_layout Subsection
38676 \begin_layout Standard
38677 Reloads the actual document from disk.
38680 \begin_layout Subsection
38684 \begin_layout Standard
38685 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
38686 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
38687 It is described in the section
38689 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
38694 Additional Features
38699 \begin_layout Subsection
38703 \begin_layout Standard
38704 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
38705 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
38707 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
38708 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
38712 \begin_layout Standard
38713 When using the menu entry
38716 \begin_inset space ~
38721 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
38725 \begin_inset space ~
38729 \begin_inset space ~
38733 \begin_inset space ~
38738 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
38739 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
38742 \begin_layout Subsection
38744 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38746 name "subsec:Export"
38753 \begin_layout Standard
38754 You can export your document to various file formats.
38755 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
38757 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
38758 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
38759 during its configuration.
38762 \begin_layout Standard
38763 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
38765 \begin_inset space ~
38769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38771 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
38778 \begin_layout Description
38784 \begin_inset space ~
38787 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
38789 \begin_inset space ~
38792 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
38793 \begin_inset Newline newline
38796 Since \SpecialChar LyX
38797 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
38801 \begin_layout Description
38802 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
38808 \begin_layout Description
38810 \begin_inset space ~
38813 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
38819 \begin_layout Description
38820 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
38821 's native DVI-format.
38822 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
38823 files paths or file names in your document.
38825 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
38832 \begin_layout Description
38833 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
38834 in files paths or file names
38837 \begin_layout Description
38839 \begin_inset space ~
38846 ) DVI-format using the program
38848 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38851 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
38855 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38863 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
38871 \begin_layout Description
38873 \begin_inset space ~
38876 (cropped) the same as
38880 but with cropped page margins.
38883 \begin_layout Description
38885 \begin_inset space ~
38888 Dot text file with code in the programming language
38892 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
38897 \begin_layout Description
38901 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38909 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
38917 \begin_layout Description
38919 \begin_inset space ~
38923 \begin_inset space ~
38926 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
38930 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
38938 \begin_layout Description
38942 \begin_inset space ~
38951 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38952 source that is compilable with the program
38954 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38958 \begin_layout Description
38962 \begin_inset space ~
38967 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38968 source, additionally all images used in the document
38969 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
38973 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
38976 \begin_layout Description
38980 \begin_inset space ~
38985 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38986 source code, additionally all images used in the document
38987 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
38995 \begin_layout Description
38999 \begin_inset space ~
39008 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39009 source that is compilable with the program
39015 \begin_layout Description
39017 \begin_inset space ~
39021 \begin_inset space ~
39028 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39029 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
39035 \begin_layout Description
39037 \begin_inset space ~
39040 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
39041 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
39043 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39047 \begin_inset space \space{}
39052 \begin_inset space ~
39056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39071 represent the version number)
39074 \begin_layout Description
39076 \begin_inset space ~
39080 \begin_inset space ~
39083 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
39084 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
39085 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39089 \begin_layout Description
39090 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
39091 's internal XHTML engine
39094 \begin_layout Description
39096 \begin_inset space ~
39100 \begin_inset space ~
39104 \begin_inset space ~
39108 \begin_inset space ~
39111 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
39116 For the conversion the program
39125 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39128 \begin_layout Description
39129 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
39134 \begin_layout Description
39136 \begin_inset space ~
39139 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
39141 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
39144 For the conversion the program
39153 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39156 \begin_layout Description
39158 \begin_inset space ~
39161 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
39162 For the conversion the program
39171 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39174 \begin_layout Description
39176 \begin_inset space ~
39179 (cropped) the same as
39182 \begin_inset space ~
39187 but with cropped page margins
39190 \begin_layout Description
39194 \begin_inset space ~
39199 PDF-format using the program
39203 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39206 \begin_layout Description
39210 \begin_inset space ~
39214 \begin_inset space ~
39222 \begin_inset space ~
39227 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
39228 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39232 \begin_inset space \space{}
39235 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
39239 \begin_layout Description
39243 \begin_inset space ~
39248 PDF-format using the program
39250 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39253 , produces PDF-files directly
39256 \begin_layout Description
39260 \begin_inset space ~
39265 PDF-format using the program
39269 , produces PDF-files directly
39272 \begin_layout Description
39276 \begin_inset space ~
39281 PDF-format using the program
39285 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39288 \begin_layout Description
39292 \begin_inset space ~
39297 PDF-format using the program
39302 , produces PDF-files directly
39305 \begin_layout Description
39309 \begin_inset space ~
39317 \begin_layout Description
39321 \begin_inset space ~
39325 \begin_inset space ~
39330 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
39331 and then exported as text using the program
39336 \begin_layout Description
39341 PostScript format using the program
39349 options see section
39350 \begin_inset space ~
39354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39356 reference "subsec:General-output"
39363 \begin_layout Description
39364 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39365 source and also code in the statistical programming
39379 it is possible to use
39383 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
39387 \begin_layout Standard
39388 If one of the menu entries
39395 \begin_inset space ~
39404 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39406 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39408 \begin_inset space ~
39412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39414 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39419 \begin_inset Index idx
39422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39423 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39432 \begin_layout Subsection
39436 \begin_layout Standard
39437 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
39438 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
39441 \begin_inset space ~
39445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39447 reference "sec:Paths"
39452 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
39461 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
39462 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
39463 's preferences as described in section
39464 \begin_inset space ~
39468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39470 reference "subsec:Converters"
39477 \begin_layout Subsection
39478 New and Close Window
39481 \begin_layout Standard
39482 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
39486 \begin_layout Subsection
39490 \begin_layout Standard
39491 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
39494 \begin_layout Section
39496 \begin_inset Index idx
39499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39508 \begin_layout Subsection
39512 \begin_layout Standard
39513 Described in section
39514 \begin_inset space ~
39518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39520 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
39527 \begin_layout Subsection
39528 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
39531 \begin_layout Standard
39532 Described in section
39533 \begin_inset space ~
39537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39539 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39546 \begin_layout Subsection
39550 \begin_layout Standard
39551 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
39552 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
39555 \begin_layout Subsection
39559 \begin_layout Standard
39560 Selects the whole document.
39563 \begin_layout Subsection
39564 Find & Replace (Quick)
39567 \begin_layout Standard
39568 Described in section
39569 \begin_inset space ~
39573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39575 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39582 \begin_layout Subsection
39583 Find & Replace (Advanced)
39586 \begin_layout Standard
39587 Described in section
39588 \begin_inset space ~
39592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39594 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
39601 \begin_layout Subsection
39602 Move Paragraph Up/Down
39605 \begin_layout Standard
39606 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
39610 \begin_layout Subsection
39612 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39616 \begin_layout Standard
39618 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39619 Described in section
39620 \begin_inset space ~
39624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39626 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39635 \begin_layout Subsection
39637 \begin_inset Index idx
39640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39641 Paragraph ! Settings
39649 \begin_layout Standard
39650 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
39651 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
39655 \begin_layout Standard
39656 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
39657 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
39663 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39664 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39666 \begin_inset space ~
39672 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
39676 \begin_layout Subsection
39678 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
39682 \begin_layout Standard
39684 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39685 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
39690 \begin_layout Enumerate
39692 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
39693 Customize text properties by means of the
39699 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
39702 ; this is described in section
39703 \begin_inset space ~
39707 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39709 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39716 \begin_layout Enumerate
39718 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
39719 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
39721 Apply last settings
39724 \begin_layout Enumerate
39726 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39727 Change the casing of selected text (
39742 \begin_layout Subsection
39744 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
39748 \begin_layout Standard
39750 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
39751 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
39752 text styles (in the case of this document:
39774 \begin_inset space ~
39778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39780 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
39789 \begin_layout Subsection
39790 Table and Rows & Columns
39793 \begin_layout Standard
39794 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
39795 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
39796 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
39799 \begin_layout Subsection
39803 \begin_layout Standard
39804 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
39805 It will dissolve this inset.
39806 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
39810 \begin_layout Subsection
39814 \begin_layout Standard
39815 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
39816 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
39819 \begin_layout Subsection
39820 Increase/Decrease List Depth
39823 \begin_layout Standard
39824 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
39826 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
39827 \begin_inset space ~
39831 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39833 reference "sec:Nesting"
39838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39840 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
39847 \begin_layout Section
39849 \begin_inset Index idx
39852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39861 \begin_layout Standard
39862 At the bottom of the
39866 menu the opened documents are listed.
39869 \begin_layout Subsection
39870 Open/Close all Insets
39873 \begin_layout Standard
39874 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
39877 \begin_layout Subsection
39878 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
39881 \begin_layout Standard
39882 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
39885 \begin_layout Standard
39886 Math macros are described in the
39893 \begin_layout Subsection
39897 \begin_layout Standard
39898 Shows the outline window as described in sections
39899 \begin_inset space ~
39903 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39905 reference "sec:Navigating"
39910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39912 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
39919 \begin_layout Subsection
39923 \begin_layout Standard
39924 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
39926 \begin_inset space ~
39930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39932 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39939 \begin_layout Subsection
39943 \begin_layout Standard
39944 Opens a window showing console messages.
39945 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
39947 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39950 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
39951 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
39952 is processing the document.
39955 \begin_layout Subsection
39957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39959 name "subsec:Toolbars"
39964 \begin_inset Index idx
39967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39976 \begin_layout Standard
39977 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
39979 All toolbars and the
39982 \begin_inset space ~
39987 can be turned on and off.
39992 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
40004 \begin_inset space ~
40016 \begin_inset space ~
40021 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
40025 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
40032 \begin_layout Standard
40037 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
40041 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
40042 or when a certain feature is enabled.
40043 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
40044 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
40045 is inside a formula or table respectively.
40048 \begin_layout Standard
40050 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
40051 \begin_inset space ~
40055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40057 reference "sec:Toolbars"
40064 \begin_layout Subsection
40068 \begin_layout Standard
40072 \begin_inset space ~
40076 \begin_inset space ~
40080 \begin_inset space ~
40084 \begin_inset space ~
40088 \begin_inset space ~
40092 \begin_inset space ~
40097 will split \SpecialChar LyX
40098 's main window vertically while
40101 \begin_inset space ~
40105 \begin_inset space ~
40109 \begin_inset space ~
40113 \begin_inset space ~
40117 \begin_inset space ~
40121 \begin_inset space ~
40126 will split it horizontally.
40127 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
40128 to view the same document, but at different positions.
40129 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
40130 three or more documents at the same time.
40131 To close a split view, use the menu
40134 \begin_inset space ~
40138 \begin_inset space ~
40146 \begin_layout Subsection
40150 \begin_layout Standard
40151 Closes a split view.
40154 \begin_layout Subsection
40158 \begin_layout Standard
40159 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
40160 so that you will see nothing but your text.
40161 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
40162 's main window fullscreen.
40163 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
40164 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
40167 \begin_layout Section
40169 \begin_inset Index idx
40172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40181 \begin_layout Subsection
40185 \begin_layout Standard
40186 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
40187 \begin_inset space ~
40191 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40193 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
40204 \begin_layout Subsection
40206 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40208 name "subsec:Special-Character"
40215 \begin_layout Standard
40216 Here you can insert the following characters:
40219 \begin_layout Description
40224 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
40227 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
40228 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40229 -packages you have installed.
40230 You can get a complete display by checking
40233 \begin_inset space ~
40239 \begin_inset Newline newline
40243 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40251 Not all characters will be visible in the
40255 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
40256 dialog (see section
40257 \begin_inset space ~
40261 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40263 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
40267 ) can display every character.
40275 \begin_layout Description
40276 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
40280 \begin_layout Description
40282 \begin_inset space ~
40286 \begin_inset space ~
40289 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
40290 \begin_inset space ~
40294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40296 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
40303 \begin_layout Description
40305 \begin_inset space ~
40308 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
40311 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40312 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40318 \begin_layout Description
40320 \begin_inset space ~
40323 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
40326 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40327 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40333 \begin_layout Description
40335 \begin_inset space ~
40338 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
40342 \begin_layout Description
40344 \begin_inset space ~
40347 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
40351 \begin_layout Description
40353 \begin_inset space ~
40356 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
40362 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40368 \begin_layout Description
40370 \begin_inset space ~
40373 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
40377 \begin_layout Description
40379 \begin_inset space ~
40383 \begin_inset Index idx
40386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40393 \begin_inset Index idx
40396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40397 Language ! Phonetic symbols
40402 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
40403 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
40405 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40411 \begin_inset Index idx
40414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40422 \begin_inset Newline newline
40425 More information about this feature can be found in the
40431 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
40437 \begin_layout Description
40438 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
40440 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
40441 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
40445 \begin_layout Subsection
40449 \begin_layout Standard
40450 Opens a submenu with the following options:
40453 \begin_layout Description
40454 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
40455 \begin_inset script superscript
40457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40466 \begin_layout Description
40467 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
40468 \begin_inset script subscript
40470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40479 \begin_layout Description
40481 \begin_inset space ~
40484 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
40485 \begin_inset space ~
40489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40491 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
40498 \begin_layout Description
40500 \begin_inset space ~
40503 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
40504 \begin_inset space ~
40508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40510 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
40517 \begin_layout Description
40519 \begin_inset space ~
40522 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
40523 \begin_inset space ~
40527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40529 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
40536 \begin_layout Description
40538 \begin_inset space ~
40541 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40547 \begin_inset space \space{}
40550 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40551 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40560 To insert a fraction use the command
40565 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40569 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40578 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40585 \begin_layout Description
40587 \begin_inset space ~
40590 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
40591 \begin_inset space ~
40595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40597 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
40604 \begin_layout Description
40606 \begin_inset space ~
40609 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
40610 \begin_inset space ~
40614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40616 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
40623 \begin_layout Description
40625 \begin_inset space ~
40628 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
40629 \begin_inset space ~
40633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40635 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
40642 \begin_layout Description
40643 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
40644 \begin_inset space ~
40648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40650 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
40657 \begin_layout Description
40659 \begin_inset space ~
40662 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
40663 \begin_inset space ~
40667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40669 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
40676 \begin_layout Description
40678 \begin_inset space ~
40681 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
40682 \begin_inset space ~
40686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40688 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
40695 \begin_layout Description
40697 \begin_inset space ~
40701 \begin_inset space ~
40704 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
40707 \begin_inset space ~
40711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40713 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
40720 for a usage example.
40723 \begin_layout Description
40725 \begin_inset space ~
40729 \begin_inset space ~
40732 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
40733 \begin_inset space ~
40737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40739 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40746 \begin_layout Description
40748 \begin_inset space ~
40751 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
40752 as described in section
40753 \begin_inset space ~
40757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40759 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40766 \begin_layout Description
40768 \begin_inset space ~
40771 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
40772 \begin_inset space ~
40776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40778 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40785 \begin_layout Description
40787 \begin_inset space ~
40790 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
40791 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
40793 \begin_inset space ~
40797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40799 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40806 \begin_layout Description
40808 \begin_inset space ~
40811 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
40812 \begin_inset space ~
40816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40818 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40825 \begin_layout Description
40827 \begin_inset space ~
40831 \begin_inset space ~
40834 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
40835 \begin_inset space ~
40839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40841 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40848 \begin_layout Subsection
40850 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
40854 \begin_layout Standard
40856 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
40857 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
40858 The submenu allows you to insert
40861 \begin_layout Description
40863 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
40865 \begin_inset space ~
40868 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
40871 \begin_layout Description
40873 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
40875 \begin_inset space ~
40879 \begin_inset space ~
40882 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
40886 \begin_layout Description
40888 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
40890 \begin_inset space ~
40893 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
40896 \begin_layout Description
40898 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
40900 \begin_inset space ~
40903 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
40906 \begin_layout Description
40908 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
40910 \begin_inset space ~
40914 \begin_inset space ~
40917 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
40921 \begin_layout Description
40923 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
40925 \begin_inset space ~
40928 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
40931 \begin_layout Description
40933 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
40935 \begin_inset space ~
40939 \begin_inset space ~
40943 \begin_inset space ~
40946 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
40949 \begin_layout Description
40951 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
40953 \begin_inset space ~
40956 Name inserts the user name as specified in
40958 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40959 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40965 \begin_layout Description
40967 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
40969 \begin_inset space ~
40972 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
40974 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40975 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40981 \begin_layout Description
40983 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
40984 Other\SpecialChar ldots
40985 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
40986 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
40989 \begin_layout Subsection
40992 List/Contents/References
40995 \begin_layout Standard
40996 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
41000 \begin_inset space ~
41021 are described in section
41022 \begin_inset space ~
41026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41028 reference "sec:toc"
41037 is described in section
41038 \begin_inset space ~
41042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41044 reference "sec:Index"
41052 is described in section
41053 \begin_inset space ~
41057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41059 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41065 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41068 is described in section
41069 \begin_inset space ~
41073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41075 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
41082 \begin_layout Subsection
41086 \begin_layout Standard
41087 To insert floats, as described in section
41088 \begin_inset space ~
41092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41094 reference "sec:Floats"
41098 and in detail the chapter
41105 \begin_inset space ~
41113 \begin_layout Subsection
41117 \begin_layout Standard
41118 To insert notes, described in section
41119 \begin_inset space ~
41123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41125 reference "sec:Notes"
41132 \begin_layout Subsection
41136 \begin_layout Standard
41137 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
41139 Branches are described in section
41140 \begin_inset space ~
41144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41146 reference "sec:Branches"
41153 \begin_layout Subsection
41157 \begin_layout Standard
41158 Inserts document class-specific insets.
41159 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
41161 An example is the document class
41162 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
41164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41172 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
41176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41181 with three custom insets.
41184 Flex insets and InsetLayout
41188 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
41194 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
41197 \begin_layout Subsection
41199 \begin_inset Index idx
41202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41211 \begin_layout Standard
41212 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
41214 For more information see chapter
41216 External Document Parts
41219 \begin_inset space ~
41225 \begin_layout Subsection
41227 \begin_inset Index idx
41230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41239 \begin_layout Standard
41240 Inserts a box in a certain style.
41241 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
41248 \begin_inset space ~
41256 \begin_layout Subsection
41260 \begin_layout Standard
41265 dialog as described in section
41266 \begin_inset space ~
41270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41272 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41279 \begin_layout Subsection
41283 \begin_layout Standard
41288 as described in section
41289 \begin_inset space ~
41293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41295 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41302 \begin_layout Subsection
41306 \begin_layout Standard
41311 as described in section
41312 \begin_inset space ~
41316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41318 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41325 \begin_layout Subsection
41327 \begin_inset Index idx
41330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41337 \begin_inset Index idx
41340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41341 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
41349 \begin_layout Standard
41350 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
41351 Floats are described in section
41352 \begin_inset space ~
41356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41358 reference "sec:Floats"
41362 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
41364 Multi-page Captions
41369 \begin_inset space ~
41377 \begin_layout Subsection
41381 \begin_layout Standard
41382 Inserts an index entry as described in section
41383 \begin_inset space ~
41387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41389 reference "sec:Index"
41396 \begin_layout Subsection
41400 \begin_layout Standard
41401 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
41402 \begin_inset space ~
41406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41408 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41415 \begin_layout Subsection
41419 \begin_layout Standard
41420 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
41421 Tables are described in section
41422 \begin_inset space ~
41426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41428 reference "sec:Tables"
41432 and in detail in the chapter
41439 \begin_inset space ~
41447 \begin_layout Subsection
41451 \begin_layout Standard
41457 Graphics are described in section
41458 \begin_inset space ~
41462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41464 reference "sec:Graphics"
41471 \begin_layout Subsection
41475 \begin_layout Standard
41476 Inserts a URL as described in section
41477 \begin_inset space ~
41481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41483 reference "subsec:URLs"
41490 \begin_layout Subsection
41494 \begin_layout Standard
41495 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
41496 \begin_inset space ~
41500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41502 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
41509 \begin_layout Subsection
41513 \begin_layout Standard
41514 Inserts a footnote as described in section
41515 \begin_inset space ~
41519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41521 reference "sec:Footnotes"
41528 \begin_layout Subsection
41532 \begin_layout Standard
41533 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
41534 \begin_inset space ~
41538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41540 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
41547 \begin_layout Subsection
41550 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
41553 \begin_layout Standard
41554 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
41555 environments of the same type.
41557 \begin_inset space ~
41561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41563 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
41567 for an explanation.
41570 \begin_layout Subsection
41574 \begin_layout Standard
41575 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
41576 title or caption of a float.
41577 Inserts a short title as described in section
41578 \begin_inset space ~
41582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41584 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
41591 \begin_layout Subsection
41596 \begin_layout Standard
41597 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
41598 Code box as described in section
41599 \begin_inset space ~
41603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41605 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
41612 \begin_layout Subsection
41614 \begin_inset Index idx
41617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41626 \begin_layout Standard
41627 Inserts a program listings box.
41628 Program listings are explained in the chapter
41630 Program Code Listings
41635 \begin_inset space ~
41643 \begin_layout Subsection
41645 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41649 \begin_layout Standard
41651 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41652 Inserts the actual date.
41653 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
41660 \begin_layout Subsection
41664 \begin_layout Standard
41665 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
41666 \begin_inset space ~
41670 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41672 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41679 \begin_layout Section
41681 \begin_inset Index idx
41684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41693 \begin_layout Standard
41694 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
41695 \begin_inset space ~
41698 of the current document.
41699 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
41702 \begin_layout Subsection
41706 \begin_layout Standard
41707 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
41708 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
41709 to jump, for example, between section
41710 \begin_inset space ~
41714 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
41715 \begin_inset space ~
41718 2.5 and use the submenu
41721 \begin_inset space ~
41725 \begin_inset space ~
41732 \begin_inset space ~
41738 \begin_inset space ~
41742 \begin_inset space ~
41748 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
41752 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
41758 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
41761 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
41764 \begin_layout Standard
41765 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
41769 \begin_inset space ~
41774 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
41777 \begin_inset space ~
41782 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
41785 \begin_layout Subsection
41786 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
41789 \begin_layout Standard
41790 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
41794 \begin_layout Subsection
41798 \begin_layout Standard
41799 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
41800 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
41801 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
41805 \begin_inset space ~
41809 \begin_inset space ~
41817 \begin_layout Subsection
41821 \begin_layout Standard
41822 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
41825 The \SpecialChar LyX
41826 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
41828 \begin_inset space ~
41836 \begin_inset space ~
41841 manual for a detailed description.
41844 \begin_layout Section
41846 \begin_inset Index idx
41849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41858 \begin_layout Subsection
41862 \begin_layout Standard
41863 Change Tracking is described in section
41864 \begin_inset space ~
41868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41870 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
41877 \begin_layout Subsection
41885 \begin_layout Standard
41886 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
41887 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
41888 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41890 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
41891 to the clipboard or update the view.
41892 \begin_inset Newline newline
41895 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41899 \begin_layout Standard
41902 Open Containing Directory
41904 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
41905 's temporary folder for the document.
41906 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
41907 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
41908 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
41909 For example some journals require to send the
41913 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41917 \begin_layout Subsection
41918 Start Appendix Here
41921 \begin_layout Standard
41922 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
41923 as described in section
41924 \begin_inset space ~
41928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41930 reference "sec:Appendices"
41937 \begin_layout Subsection
41939 \begin_inset space ~
41945 \begin_layout Standard
41946 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
41947 default output format for the document (menu
41949 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41950 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41951 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41953 \begin_inset space ~
41957 \begin_inset space ~
41963 \begin_inset space ~
41967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41969 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41973 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
41976 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41977 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41979 \begin_inset space ~
41982 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41984 \begin_inset space ~
41987 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41989 \begin_inset space ~
41993 \begin_inset space ~
41999 \begin_inset space ~
42003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42005 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42009 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
42010 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42012 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42013 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42015 \begin_inset space ~
42018 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42020 \begin_inset space ~
42023 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42027 \begin_inset space ~
42031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42033 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42038 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42039 when it is first configured.
42040 The default output format is
42043 \begin_inset space ~
42051 \begin_layout Subsection
42052 View (Other Formats)
42055 \begin_layout Standard
42056 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
42057 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
42058 actual document with an external program.
42059 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
42060 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42061 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
42063 All possible formats are listed in section
42064 \begin_inset space ~
42068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42070 reference "subsec:Export"
42075 You should at least see the menu entry
42080 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42082 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
42084 \begin_inset space ~
42088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42090 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42095 \begin_inset Index idx
42098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42099 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42108 \begin_layout Standard
42109 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
42110 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42112 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42113 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42115 \begin_inset space ~
42118 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42120 \begin_inset space ~
42123 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42127 \begin_inset space ~
42131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42133 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42138 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42139 when it is first configured.
42142 \begin_layout Subsection
42144 \begin_inset space ~
42150 \begin_layout Standard
42151 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
42152 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
42155 \begin_layout Subsection
42156 Update (Other Formats)
42159 \begin_layout Standard
42160 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
42161 your document without opening a new viewer window.
42164 \begin_layout Subsection
42165 View Master Document
42168 \begin_layout Standard
42169 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42185 \begin_inset space ~
42190 manual for more information on this topic).
42191 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
42192 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
42196 \begin_inset space ~
42200 \begin_inset space ~
42205 generates the output of the whole book, while
42209 will just output the chapter alone.
42212 \begin_layout Standard
42213 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42214 in the document settings (menu
42216 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42217 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42218 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42220 \begin_inset space ~
42224 \begin_inset space ~
42230 \begin_inset space ~
42234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42236 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42240 ) or in the preferences (menu
42242 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42243 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42245 \begin_inset space ~
42248 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42250 \begin_inset space ~
42253 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42255 \begin_inset space ~
42259 \begin_inset space ~
42265 \begin_inset space ~
42269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42271 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42278 \begin_layout Subsection
42279 Update Master Document
42282 \begin_layout Standard
42283 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42299 \begin_inset space ~
42304 manual for more information on this topic).
42305 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
42306 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
42309 \begin_layout Standard
42310 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42311 in the document settings (menu
42313 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42314 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42315 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42317 \begin_inset space ~
42321 \begin_inset space ~
42327 \begin_inset space ~
42331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42333 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42337 ) or in the preferences (menu
42339 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42340 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42342 \begin_inset space ~
42345 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42347 \begin_inset space ~
42350 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42352 \begin_inset space ~
42356 \begin_inset space ~
42362 \begin_inset space ~
42366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42368 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42375 \begin_layout Subsection
42377 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42379 name "subsec:Compressed"
42386 \begin_layout Standard
42387 Un/compresses the current document.
42388 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
42389 compression (see the
42391 Additional Features
42393 manual for details).
42396 \begin_layout Subsection
42400 \begin_layout Standard
42401 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
42404 \begin_layout Subsection
42408 \begin_layout Standard
42409 The document settings are described in appendix
42410 \begin_inset space ~
42414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42416 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42423 \begin_layout Section
42425 \begin_inset Index idx
42428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42437 \begin_layout Subsection
42441 \begin_layout Standard
42442 Spell checking is explained in section
42443 \begin_inset space ~
42447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42449 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
42456 \begin_layout Subsection
42460 \begin_layout Standard
42461 The thesaurus is described in section
42462 \begin_inset space ~
42466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42468 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
42475 \begin_layout Subsection
42477 \begin_inset Index idx
42480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42487 \begin_inset Index idx
42490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42499 \begin_layout Standard
42500 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
42501 the highlighted document part.
42504 \begin_layout Subsection
42510 \begin_inset Index idx
42513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42514 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42523 \begin_layout Standard
42524 Generates with the help of the program
42526 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42529 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
42530 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
42531 This feature is not available on Windows.
42534 \begin_layout Subsection
42540 \begin_inset Index idx
42543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42553 \begin_layout Standard
42554 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42559 \begin_inset space ~
42564 to see the full filename paths.
42567 \begin_layout Subsection
42569 \begin_inset Index idx
42572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42581 \begin_layout Standard
42582 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
42583 files as described in section
42584 \begin_inset space ~
42588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42590 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
42597 \begin_layout Subsection
42599 \begin_inset Index idx
42602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42615 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42633 \begin_inset Index idx
42636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42637 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42646 \begin_layout Standard
42647 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
42648 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
42649 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42650 -packages and programs it needs; see
42652 \begin_inset space ~
42656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42658 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42665 \begin_layout Subsection
42669 \begin_layout Standard
42674 dialog as described in detail in appendix
42675 \begin_inset space ~
42679 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42681 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42688 \begin_layout Section
42690 \begin_inset Index idx
42693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42702 \begin_layout Standard
42703 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
42704 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
42706 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
42710 \begin_layout Standard
42714 \begin_inset space ~
42719 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
42720 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42721 packages and classes found
42722 by \SpecialChar LyX
42724 \begin_inset space ~
42728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42730 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
42737 \begin_layout Standard
42741 \begin_inset space ~
42746 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
42751 \begin_layout Section
42753 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42755 name "sec:Toolbars"
42762 \begin_layout Standard
42763 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
42764 \begin_inset space ~
42768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42770 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
42777 \begin_layout Standard
42778 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
42779 This is described in the
42781 Additional Features
42786 \begin_layout Subsection
42788 \begin_inset Index idx
42791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42800 \begin_layout Standard
42801 \begin_inset Graphics
42802 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
42810 \begin_layout Standard
42811 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42817 \begin_layout Standard
42818 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42835 \begin_inset Note Note
42838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42839 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
42844 manual for more information.
42852 \begin_layout Standard
42853 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42859 \begin_layout Standard
42860 \begin_inset Tabular
42861 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
42862 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42863 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42864 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42870 \begin_inset Graphics
42871 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
42881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42885 pull-down box for the environments
42898 \begin_layout Standard
42899 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
42905 \begin_layout Standard
42907 \begin_inset Tabular
42908 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
42909 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42910 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42911 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42912 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42935 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42942 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42965 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42972 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42995 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43002 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43011 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
43019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43025 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43032 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43041 arg "spelling-continuously"
43049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43053 Spellcheck continuously
43059 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43082 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43089 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43112 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43119 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43142 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43149 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43172 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43179 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43202 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43204 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
43209 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43218 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43227 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
43235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43241 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43243 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43247 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43251 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43260 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43267 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
43275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43281 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43283 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43287 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43300 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43309 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
43317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43323 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43324 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
43331 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43352 Emphasize text, function of the
43353 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
43356 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43358 \begin_inset space ~
43361 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43363 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
43369 arg "dialog-show character"
43380 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43401 Set text to noun style, function of the
43402 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
43405 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43407 \begin_inset space ~
43410 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43412 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
43418 arg "dialog-show character"
43429 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43435 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
43438 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
43446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43451 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
43454 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43461 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43467 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
43472 arg "textstyle-apply"
43482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43487 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
43488 Format text using the current settings in the
43490 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43492 \begin_inset space ~
43495 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43506 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43529 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43530 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
43532 \begin_inset space ~
43541 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43550 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
43558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43564 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43571 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43578 arg "tabular-insert"
43586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43592 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43599 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43605 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
43608 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
43616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43621 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
43624 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43631 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43640 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
43648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43652 Toggle outline window on/off,
43654 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43661 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43670 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
43678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43682 Toggle math toolbar on/off
43688 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43697 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
43705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43709 Toggle table toolbar on/off
43722 \begin_layout Subsection
43724 \begin_inset Index idx
43727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43736 \begin_layout Standard
43737 \begin_inset Graphics
43738 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
43746 \begin_layout Standard
43747 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43753 \begin_layout Standard
43754 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43758 \begin_layout Standard
43759 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43765 \begin_layout Standard
43766 \begin_inset Tabular
43767 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
43768 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43769 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43770 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43771 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43798 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43807 arg "layout Enumerate"
43815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43825 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43834 arg "layout Itemize"
43842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43852 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43879 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43888 arg "layout Description"
43896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43906 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43915 arg "depth-increment"
43923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43929 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43931 \begin_inset space ~
43935 \begin_inset space ~
43944 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43953 arg "depth-decrement"
43961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43967 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43969 \begin_inset space ~
43973 \begin_inset space ~
43982 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43991 arg "float-insert figure"
43999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44005 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44006 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44013 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44022 arg "float-insert table"
44030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44036 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44037 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44044 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44067 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44074 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44083 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
44091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44097 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44104 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44113 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
44121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44127 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44134 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44157 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44159 \begin_inset space ~
44168 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44177 arg "nomencl-insert"
44185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44191 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44193 \begin_inset space ~
44202 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44211 arg "footnote-insert"
44219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44225 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44232 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44241 arg "marginalnote-insert"
44249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44255 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44257 \begin_inset space ~
44266 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44289 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44290 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
44292 \begin_inset space ~
44301 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44310 arg "box-insert Frameless"
44318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44324 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44331 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44354 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44361 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44384 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44386 \begin_inset space ~
44395 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44404 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
44412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44418 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44419 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44426 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44435 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
44443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44449 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44450 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44452 \begin_inset space ~
44461 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44470 arg "dialog-show character"
44478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44484 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44486 \begin_inset space ~
44489 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44496 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44502 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
44507 arg "textstyle-apply"
44515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44520 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
44521 Format text using the recent settings in the
44524 arg "dialog-show character"
44533 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44542 arg "layout-paragraph"
44550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44556 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44558 \begin_inset space ~
44567 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44576 arg "thesaurus-entry"
44584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44590 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44604 \begin_layout Subsection
44605 View/Update Toolbar
44606 \begin_inset Index idx
44609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44610 Toolbar ! View / Update
44618 \begin_layout Standard
44619 \begin_inset Graphics
44620 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
44627 \begin_layout Standard
44628 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44634 \begin_layout Standard
44635 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44639 \begin_layout Standard
44640 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44646 \begin_layout Standard
44647 \begin_inset Tabular
44648 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
44649 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44650 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44651 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44652 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44675 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44682 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44691 arg "buffer-update"
44699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44705 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44712 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44721 arg "master-buffer-view"
44729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44735 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44737 \begin_inset space ~
44746 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44755 arg "master-buffer-update"
44763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44769 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44771 \begin_inset space ~
44775 \begin_inset space ~
44784 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44793 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
44801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44807 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44808 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44809 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44810 Synchronize with Output
44816 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44827 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
44837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44843 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44844 View (Other Formats)
44850 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44857 arg "update-others"
44861 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
44869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44875 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44876 Update (Other Formats)
44889 \begin_layout Standard
44891 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
44892 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
44898 \begin_layout Subsection
44902 \begin_layout Standard
44903 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
44904 \begin_inset space ~
44908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44910 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44914 , the table toolbar
44915 \begin_inset Index idx
44918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44927 \begin_inset space ~
44932 manual and the math macro toolbar
44933 \begin_inset Index idx
44936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44949 \begin_layout Chapter
44950 The Document Settings
44951 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44953 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
44958 \begin_inset Index idx
44961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44962 Document ! Settings
44970 \begin_layout Standard
44974 \begin_inset space ~
44979 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
44980 is called with the menu
44982 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44986 You can save your document settings as default with the
44988 Save as Document Defaults
44990 button in any dialog.
44991 This will create a template named
44995 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
44996 when you create a new document without
45000 \begin_layout Standard
45005 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
45006 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
45009 \begin_layout Standard
45010 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
45011 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
45012 to find the one you are looking for.
45013 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
45014 the submenus of the dialog.
45016 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45020 \begin_inset space \space{}
45024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45031 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
45032 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
45033 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
45036 \begin_layout Section
45040 \begin_layout Standard
45041 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
45043 Document classes are described in section
45044 \begin_inset space ~
45048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45050 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
45058 \begin_layout Standard
45062 \begin_inset space ~
45067 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
45072 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
45073 as a layout for a document class.
45074 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
45076 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
45085 \begin_layout Standard
45086 Some classes use special class options by default.
45087 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
45091 and you can decide to use them or not.
45092 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
45093 recommended you leave them untouched.
45098 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45099 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
45104 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45106 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
45111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45112 When you want to use one of the following drivers
45113 \begin_inset Newline newline
45118 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
45121 \begin_inset Newline newline
45124 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45125 distribution, see section
45130 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45132 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
45145 \begin_layout Standard
45150 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
45151 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
45152 in the background if the child document
45153 is opened without its master.
45154 This way child documents are always compilable.
45155 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
45162 \begin_inset space ~
45170 \begin_layout Standard
45171 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45182 \begin_inset Index idx
45185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45187 packages ! prettyref
45193 \begin_inset Index idx
45196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45198 packages ! refstyle
45203 for cross-references, see section
45204 \begin_inset space ~
45208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45210 reference "sec:Cross-References"
45217 \begin_layout Section
45221 \begin_layout Standard
45222 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
45223 Please refer to the section
45226 \begin_inset space ~
45234 \begin_inset space ~
45239 manual for details.
45242 \begin_layout Section
45246 \begin_layout Standard
45247 Modules are explained in section
45248 \begin_inset space ~
45252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45254 reference "subsec:Modules"
45261 \begin_layout Section
45265 \begin_layout Standard
45267 \begin_inset space ~
45271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45273 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
45280 \begin_layout Section
45284 \begin_layout Standard
45285 The document font settings are described in section
45286 \begin_inset space ~
45290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45292 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
45299 \begin_layout Section
45303 \begin_layout Standard
45304 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
45316 \begin_inset space ~
45321 and whether it should be a
45324 \begin_inset space ~
45329 can also be specified here.
45332 \begin_layout Standard
45333 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
45334 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
45335 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
45337 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
45340 \begin_layout Standard
45343 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
45346 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
45347 justifies the text on screen.
45348 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
45350 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
45354 \begin_layout Standard
45356 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
45365 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
45370 \begin_layout Section
45374 \begin_layout Standard
45375 This dialog is described in sections
45376 \begin_inset space ~
45380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45382 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
45387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45389 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
45396 \begin_layout Section
45400 \begin_layout Standard
45401 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
45402 \begin_inset space ~
45406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45408 reference "subsec:Margins"
45415 \begin_layout Section
45417 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45419 name "sec:Language-encodings"
45424 \begin_inset Index idx
45427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45428 Language ! Encoding
45436 \begin_layout Standard
45437 The document language and quote styles are set here.
45438 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
45439 (the \SpecialChar LyX
45441 is always encoded in utf8).
45442 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
45443 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
45444 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45445 -command is not known for
45446 a particular character).
45447 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
45451 \begin_layout Standard
45453 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
45454 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
45455 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
45456 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
45457 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
45458 's default encoding).
45459 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
45460 's Unicode support covers the
45461 characters of most scripts.
45462 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
45463 using one of the traditional, or
45464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45471 , encodings is necessary.
45474 \begin_layout Standard
45476 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
45478 provides support for these traditional encodings.
45481 Traditional (auto-selected)
45487 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
45488 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
45489 the given language(s).
45491 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45495 \begin_layout Standard
45497 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45498 If you use the option
45503 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
45506 If the document contains text in more than one language you
45507 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
45510 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45513 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
45514 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
45515 exactly one encoding.
45516 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
45521 \begin_layout Standard
45523 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
45524 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
45530 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
45531 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45535 \begin_layout Standard
45537 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
45538 Finally, you can also select
45542 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
45543 Note that this encoding is then used for
45548 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
45549 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
45553 \begin_layout Standard
45555 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
45558 Do not load inputenc
45560 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
45561 from automatically loading the
45568 \begin_inset Index idx
45571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45573 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
45575 packages ! inputenc
45581 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
45582 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
45583 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45584 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45585 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45587 Note that this option is only available for the standard
45593 Traditional (auto-selected)
45600 \begin_layout Standard
45602 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
45604 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
45605 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
45606 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45607 installation supports Unicode), choose
45608 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
45609 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45610 is quite incomplete, so
45611 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
45616 (when \SpecialChar LyX
45617 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45618 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
45619 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45620 -commands is not used, because all
45621 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
45622 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45623 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45624 , two new alternative engines
45625 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45627 Both engines support Unicode natively.
45629 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
45632 \begin_inset space ~
45640 \begin_inset space ~
45648 \begin_inset space ~
45654 \begin_inset space ~
45658 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45660 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
45665 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
45669 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
45674 \begin_layout Standard
45678 \begin_inset space ~
45683 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45684 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
45686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45694 The possible settings are:
45697 \begin_layout Description
45698 Default uses the language package that is selected in
45700 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45701 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45705 \begin_inset space ~
45709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45711 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
45718 \begin_layout Description
45719 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
45720 format you will use.
45721 In many cases this will be
45726 \begin_inset Index idx
45729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45737 If the newer package
45742 \begin_inset Index idx
45745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45747 packages ! polyglossia
45752 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45753 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45754 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
45756 this package will be used instead of
45763 \begin_layout Description
45765 \begin_inset space ~
45776 would be more appropriate.
45779 \begin_layout Description
45780 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
45781 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
45785 (for German texts), type in
45788 \begin_inset Newline newline
45793 usepackage{ngerman}
45796 \begin_layout Description
45797 None will not use a language package.
45798 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
45801 \begin_layout Standard
45802 Here is a list with the important encodings:
45805 \begin_layout Description
45807 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
45809 \begin_inset space ~
45813 \begin_inset space ~
45817 \begin_inset space ~
45824 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45830 \begin_inset Index idx
45833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45835 packages ! inputenc
45841 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45842 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45843 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45849 \begin_layout Description
45850 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
45852 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
45853 commands, which may result in a big
45854 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
45855 -commands are needed.
45857 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
45858 This is the same as the
45871 \begin_layout Description
45873 \begin_inset space ~
45877 \begin_inset space ~
45880 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
45883 \begin_layout Description
45885 \begin_inset space ~
45889 \begin_inset space ~
45892 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
45895 \begin_layout Description
45897 \begin_inset space ~
45900 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
45903 \begin_layout Description
45905 \begin_inset space ~
45909 \begin_inset space ~
45912 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
45913 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
45916 \begin_layout Description
45918 \begin_inset space ~
45922 \begin_inset space ~
45925 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
45929 \begin_layout Description
45931 \begin_inset space ~
45935 \begin_inset space ~
45938 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
45939 ISO-8859-13 encoding
45942 \begin_layout Description
45944 \begin_inset space ~
45948 \begin_inset space ~
45952 \begin_inset space ~
45955 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
45956 \begin_inset space ~
45962 \begin_layout Description
45964 \begin_inset space ~
45968 \begin_inset space ~
45972 \begin_inset space ~
45975 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
45976 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
45979 \begin_layout Description
45981 \begin_inset space ~
45985 \begin_inset space ~
45988 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
45989 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
45990 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45991 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
45992 \begin_inset space ~
45996 \begin_inset space ~
46002 \begin_layout Description
46004 \begin_inset space ~
46008 \begin_inset space ~
46011 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
46012 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
46013 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46015 should try to use the encoding Unicode
46016 \begin_inset space ~
46020 \begin_inset space ~
46026 \begin_layout Description
46028 \begin_inset space ~
46032 \begin_inset space ~
46035 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
46038 \begin_layout Description
46040 \begin_inset space ~
46044 \begin_inset space ~
46047 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
46050 \begin_layout Description
46052 \begin_inset space ~
46056 \begin_inset space ~
46059 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
46062 \begin_layout Description
46064 \begin_inset space ~
46067 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
46070 \begin_layout Description
46072 \begin_inset space ~
46075 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
46078 \begin_layout Description
46080 \begin_inset space ~
46084 \begin_inset space ~
46087 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
46090 \begin_layout Description
46092 \begin_inset space ~
46096 \begin_inset space ~
46102 \begin_layout Description
46104 \begin_inset space ~
46108 \begin_inset space ~
46111 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
46114 \begin_layout Description
46116 \begin_inset space ~
46120 \begin_inset space ~
46126 \begin_layout Description
46128 \begin_inset space ~
46132 \begin_inset space ~
46135 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46141 \begin_inset Index idx
46144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46151 , when using this, set the document language to
46156 \begin_layout Description
46158 \begin_inset space ~
46162 \begin_inset space ~
46165 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46170 , when using this, set the document language to
46173 \begin_inset space ~
46179 \begin_layout Description
46181 \begin_inset space ~
46185 \begin_inset space ~
46188 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46194 \begin_inset Index idx
46197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46199 packages ! japanese
46204 , when using this, set the document language to
46209 \begin_layout Description
46211 \begin_inset space ~
46215 \begin_inset space ~
46218 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46223 , when using this, set the document language to
46228 \begin_layout Description
46230 \begin_inset space ~
46234 \begin_inset space ~
46237 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46242 , when using this, set the document language to
46247 \begin_layout Description
46249 \begin_inset space ~
46252 (EUC-KR) for Korean
46255 \begin_layout Description
46257 \begin_inset space ~
46261 \begin_inset space ~
46265 \begin_inset space ~
46268 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
46271 \begin_layout Description
46273 \begin_inset space ~
46277 \begin_inset space ~
46281 \begin_inset space ~
46284 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
46285 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
46286 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
46289 \begin_layout Description
46291 \begin_inset space ~
46295 \begin_inset space ~
46301 \begin_layout Description
46303 \begin_inset space ~
46307 \begin_inset space ~
46310 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
46311 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
46314 \begin_layout Description
46316 \begin_inset space ~
46320 \begin_inset space ~
46323 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46329 \begin_inset Index idx
46332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46339 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
46340 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
46342 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46343 with the default encoding (
46345 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46351 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
46352 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46357 \begin_layout Description
46359 \begin_inset space ~
46367 \begin_inset space ~
46370 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
46377 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46380 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46387 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46388 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46390 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46393 \begin_layout Description
46395 \begin_inset space ~
46399 \begin_inset space ~
46402 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46408 \begin_inset Index idx
46411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46419 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
46422 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
46424 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
46425 This used to be more comprehensive than
46428 \begin_inset space ~
46433 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
46438 \begin_layout Description
46440 \begin_inset space ~
46443 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46449 \begin_inset Index idx
46452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46454 packages ! inputenc
46461 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
46462 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
46464 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
46465 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46466 with the default encoding (
46468 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46474 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
46475 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46480 \begin_layout Description
46482 \begin_inset space ~
46486 \begin_inset space ~
46490 \begin_inset space ~
46493 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
46494 \begin_inset space ~
46500 \begin_layout Description
46502 \begin_inset space ~
46506 \begin_inset space ~
46510 \begin_inset space ~
46513 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
46514 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
46515 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
46519 \begin_layout Description
46521 \begin_inset space ~
46525 \begin_inset space ~
46529 \begin_inset space ~
46532 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
46533 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
46536 \begin_layout Section
46538 \begin_inset Index idx
46541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46548 \begin_inset Index idx
46551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46558 \begin_inset Index idx
46561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46562 Color ! Shaded boxes
46568 \begin_inset Index idx
46571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46572 Color ! Greyed-out notes
46580 \begin_layout Standard
46581 Here you can alter the font color for the
46585 (default: black), for
46588 \begin_inset space ~
46593 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
46597 (default: white) and for
46600 \begin_inset space ~
46610 sets the color back to the default.
46613 \begin_layout Standard
46614 Clicking any button showing
46622 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
46623 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
46624 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
46625 later more quickly.
46628 \begin_layout Standard
46629 Note, if you change the
46632 \begin_inset space ~
46637 font color and use the option
46640 \begin_inset space ~
46645 in the document settings under
46648 \begin_inset space ~
46653 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
46654 \begin_inset space ~
46658 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46660 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
46667 \begin_layout Standard
46668 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
46674 \begin_layout Standard
46678 \begin_inset space ~
46687 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
46690 \begin_inset space ~
46693 Code after a forced page break:
46696 \begin_layout Itemize
46697 For the page color:
46698 \begin_inset Newline newline
46705 pagecolor{color name}
46708 \begin_layout Itemize
46709 For the text color:
46710 \begin_inset Newline newline
46720 \begin_layout Standard
46721 You are restricted to one of
46757 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
46764 \begin_inset space ~
46770 \begin_inset Newline newline
46773 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
46774 names to refer to them:
46777 \begin_layout Itemize
46783 \begin_inset Newline newline
46788 page_backgroundcolor
46791 \begin_layout Itemize
46795 \begin_inset space ~
46801 \begin_inset Newline newline
46809 \begin_layout Itemize
46813 \begin_inset space ~
46819 \begin_inset Newline newline
46827 \begin_layout Itemize
46831 \begin_inset space ~
46837 \begin_inset Newline newline
46845 \begin_layout Standard
46846 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
46849 \begin_inset space ~
46857 \begin_inset space ~
46865 \begin_layout Section
46869 \begin_layout Standard
46870 Here you can adjust the
46874 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
46878 as described in section
46879 \begin_inset space ~
46883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46885 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
46890 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
46894 \begin_layout Standard
46896 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
46897 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
46899 The functionality is handled by package lineno and and additional options
46900 of this package can be used as well.
46901 The most common one are:
46904 \begin_layout Description
46906 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
46907 right Line numbers to the right margin
46910 \begin_layout Description
46912 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
46913 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
46917 \begin_layout Description
46919 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
46920 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
46923 \begin_layout Description
46925 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620780
46926 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
46929 \begin_layout Description
46931 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
46933 \begin_inset space ~
46936 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
46941 \begin_layout Section
46945 \begin_layout Standard
46946 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46952 \begin_inset Index idx
46955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46957 packages ! biblatex
46967 \begin_inset Index idx
46970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46982 \begin_inset Index idx
46985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46993 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46996 Sectioned bibliography
46998 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47004 \begin_inset Index idx
47007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47009 packages ! bibtopic
47019 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
47020 Finally, you can select a document-specific
47024 for the generation of the bibliography.
47025 For a further description of these possibilities see section
47026 \begin_inset space ~
47030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47032 reference "sec:Bibliography"
47039 \begin_layout Section
47043 \begin_layout Standard
47044 Here you can define the
47048 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
47050 \begin_inset space ~
47054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47056 reference "sec:Index"
47063 \begin_layout Section
47067 \begin_layout Standard
47068 The PDF properties are explained in section
47069 \begin_inset space ~
47073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47075 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47082 \begin_layout Section
47086 \begin_layout Standard
47087 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
47088 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47094 \begin_inset Index idx
47097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47109 \begin_inset Index idx
47112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47124 \begin_inset Index idx
47127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47139 \begin_inset Index idx
47142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47154 \begin_inset Index idx
47157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47159 packages ! mathdots
47169 \begin_inset Index idx
47172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47174 packages ! mathtools
47184 \begin_inset Index idx
47187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47199 \begin_inset Index idx
47202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47204 packages ! stackrel
47214 \begin_inset Index idx
47217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47219 packages ! stmaryrd
47229 \begin_inset Index idx
47232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47234 packages ! undertilde
47239 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
47242 \begin_layout Description
47243 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47244 -errors in formulas,
47245 ensure that you have this enabled.
47248 \begin_layout Description
47249 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
47250 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47251 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
47255 \begin_layout Description
47256 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
47259 \begin_inset space ~
47271 \begin_layout Description
47272 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
47275 \begin_inset space ~
47287 \begin_layout Description
47288 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
47299 \begin_layout Description
47300 mathtools is used for the math commands
47336 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
47343 \begin_layout Description
47344 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
47346 Chemical Symbols and Equations
47355 \begin_layout Description
47356 stackrel is used for the math command
47373 \begin_layout Description
47374 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
47377 \begin_layout Description
47378 undertilde is used for the math command
47386 Accents for one Character
47395 \begin_layout Section
47397 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
47399 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
47405 \begin_layout Standard
47407 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
47408 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
47411 \begin_layout Standard
47413 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
47414 The float placement options
47415 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
47418 are described in the section
47421 \begin_inset space ~
47425 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
47427 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
47435 \begin_inset space ~
47443 \begin_layout Section
47447 \begin_layout Standard
47448 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
47450 Program Code Listings
47455 \begin_inset space ~
47463 \begin_layout Section
47467 \begin_layout Standard
47468 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
47476 set to be used and set the
47481 The itemize environment is described in section
47482 \begin_inset space ~
47486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47488 reference "sec:Itemize"
47495 \begin_layout Standard
47496 You can furthermore specify a
47499 \begin_inset space ~
47504 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47505 command of the desired character.
47506 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
47513 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
47515 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47519 \begin_inset space \space{}
47523 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
47533 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
47534 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
47537 \begin_layout Standard
47538 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47546 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47547 -packages in the preamble (menu
47550 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47551 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47554 \begin_inset space ~
47560 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
47564 usepackage{textcomp}
47567 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
47571 usepackage{amssymb}
47581 \begin_layout Section
47585 \begin_layout Standard
47586 Branches are described in section
47587 \begin_inset space ~
47591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47593 reference "sec:Branches"
47600 \begin_layout Section
47602 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47604 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
47611 \begin_layout Standard
47612 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
47615 \begin_layout Description
47617 \begin_inset space ~
47621 \begin_inset space ~
47624 Format: The format that is used when you enter
47625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47644 View Master Document
47645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47652 Update Master Document
47653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47660 menu or the toolbar.
47661 The default is set in
47663 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47664 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47666 \begin_inset space ~
47669 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
47673 \begin_inset space ~
47677 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47679 reference "sec:File-Formats"
47686 \begin_layout Description
47688 \begin_inset space ~
47692 \begin_inset space ~
47695 Output settings for the menu
47697 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47699 \begin_inset space ~
47705 For a detailed description see section
47707 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47712 \begin_inset space ~
47720 \begin_layout Description
47722 \begin_inset space ~
47726 \begin_inset space ~
47729 Options offers settings for the export format
47737 \begin_inset space ~
47742 will assure that the output follows exactly version
47743 \begin_inset space ~
47746 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
47750 \begin_inset space ~
47755 settings are described in detail in section
47757 Math Output in XHTML
47762 \begin_inset space ~
47771 \begin_inset space ~
47775 \begin_inset space ~
47780 is used for the size of equations in the output.
47783 \begin_layout Description
47785 \begin_inset space ~
47790 Save transient properties
47792 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
47793 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
47794 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
47798 \begin_layout Itemize
47799 the activation of change tracking
47802 \begin_layout Itemize
47803 the output of tracked changes
47806 \begin_layout Itemize
47807 the recording of the document directory path.
47810 \begin_layout Standard
47811 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
47812 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
47816 \begin_layout Section
47824 \begin_layout Standard
47825 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47827 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
47829 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47831 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
47835 \begin_layout Standard
47836 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47837 -syntax is given in section
47838 \begin_inset space ~
47842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47844 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
47851 \begin_layout Chapter
47857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47859 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
47864 \begin_inset Index idx
47867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47876 \begin_layout Standard
47877 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
47879 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47883 It has the following submenus.
47886 \begin_layout Section
47890 \begin_layout Subsection
47894 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47895 User Interface File
47896 \begin_inset Index idx
47899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47900 Customization ! of toolbars
47906 \begin_inset Index idx
47909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47910 Customization ! of menus
47918 \begin_layout Standard
47919 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
47920 interface (ui) file.
47921 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
47929 \begin_layout Description
47934 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
47937 \begin_layout Description
47944 the menu entries in popup context menus
47947 \begin_layout Description
47952 specifies the toolbar buttons
47955 \begin_layout Standard
47956 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
47957 and edit the entries.
47960 \begin_layout Standard
47961 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
47973 entries must be finished with an explicit
47998 and in the case of the
47999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48011 The syntax for the entries is:
48014 \begin_layout Standard
48015 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48044 \begin_layout Standard
48046 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48049 All the \SpecialChar LyX
48050 -functions are listed in the menu
48052 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
48054 \begin_inset space ~
48062 \begin_layout Standard
48063 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48069 \begin_layout Standard
48070 For example, assuming you use the menu
48072 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48075 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
48079 \begin_layout Standard
48080 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48104 \begin_layout Standard
48106 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48121 to have the sixth bookmark.
48124 \begin_layout Standard
48128 \begin_inset space ~
48133 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
48134 's toolbar buttons.
48135 The currently available icon sets are compared in
48136 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48139 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
48147 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48151 \begin_layout Standard
48154 Enable tool tips in main work area
48156 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
48160 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48164 \begin_layout Standard
48169 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
48170 should display in the menu
48172 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48174 \begin_inset space ~
48182 \begin_layout Subsection
48186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48190 \begin_layout Standard
48193 Restore window layouts and geometries
48196 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
48197 the last \SpecialChar LyX
48201 \begin_layout Standard
48204 Restore cursor positions
48206 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
48210 \begin_layout Standard
48213 Load opened files from last session
48215 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
48219 \begin_layout Standard
48222 Clear all session information
48224 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
48225 sessions (cursor positions, names
48226 of last opened documents, etc.).
48229 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48233 name "subsec:Backup documents"
48238 \begin_inset Index idx
48241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48250 \begin_layout Standard
48253 Backup original documents when saving
48255 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
48256 it was saved the last time.
48257 It is stored in the
48260 \begin_inset space ~
48266 \begin_inset space ~
48270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48272 reference "sec:Paths"
48276 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
48279 \begin_inset space ~
48285 The backup file has the file extension
48286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48300 \begin_layout Standard
48303 Backup documents, every
48305 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
48308 \begin_layout Standard
48311 Save documents compressed by default
48313 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
48314 \begin_inset space ~
48318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48320 reference "subsec:Compressed"
48325 This applies to newly created documents only.
48326 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
48329 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48330 Windows & work area
48333 \begin_layout Standard
48336 Open documents in tabs
48338 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
48342 \begin_layout Standard
48347 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
48352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48354 \begin_inset space ~
48358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48360 reference "sec:Paths"
48364 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
48371 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
48372 documents will be opened in the same running instance
48373 of \SpecialChar LyX
48375 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
48376 instance is created for each file.
48379 \begin_layout Standard
48382 Single close-tab button
48384 is checked, there will only be one close button (
48394 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
48395 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
48396 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
48400 \begin_layout Standard
48401 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48409 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
48410 before the change takes effect.
48418 \begin_layout Standard
48423 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
48425 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
48427 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
48431 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
48432 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
48433 and only want to close the view in once instance.
48436 \begin_layout Subsection
48438 \begin_inset Index idx
48441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48448 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48450 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
48457 \begin_layout Standard
48458 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
48462 \begin_layout Standard
48463 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48471 This section only deals with the fonts
48475 the \SpecialChar LyX
48477 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
48480 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48481 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48492 \begin_layout Standard
48493 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
48510 (depends on the system) as its
48513 \begin_inset space ~
48529 \begin_layout Standard
48530 You can change the font size with the
48537 \begin_layout Standard
48542 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
48544 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48547 points have the size of 1
48548 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48552 \begin_inset space ~
48556 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48558 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
48563 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
48564 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48568 The sizes are explained in detail in section
48569 \begin_inset space ~
48573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48575 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
48582 \begin_layout Subsection
48584 \begin_inset Index idx
48587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48588 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
48595 \begin_inset Index idx
48598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48607 \begin_layout Standard
48608 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
48609 by choosing an item in the
48610 list and selecting the
48617 \begin_layout Standard
48618 By checking the option
48622 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
48625 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
48626 \begin_inset space ~
48630 \begin_inset space ~
48635 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
48638 \begin_layout Subsection
48640 \begin_inset Index idx
48643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48652 \begin_layout Standard
48653 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
48657 \begin_layout Standard
48662 enables previewing snippets of your document.
48663 This feature is described in section
48664 \begin_inset space ~
48668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48670 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
48677 \begin_layout Standard
48678 Checking the option
48681 \begin_inset space ~
48685 \begin_inset space ~
48689 \begin_inset space ~
48694 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
48697 \begin_layout Section
48699 \begin_inset Index idx
48702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48711 \begin_layout Subsection
48715 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48719 \begin_layout Standard
48722 Cursor follows scrollbar
48724 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
48728 \begin_layout Standard
48729 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
48730 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
48731 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
48734 \begin_layout Standard
48737 Scroll below end of document
48739 is self-explanatory.
48742 \begin_layout Standard
48743 In \SpecialChar LyX
48744 one can jump from word to word by pressing
48751 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
48753 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
48754 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
48757 \begin_layout Standard
48760 Sort environments alphabetically
48762 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
48765 \begin_layout Standard
48768 Group environments by their category
48770 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
48773 \begin_layout Standard
48778 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
48789 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48793 \begin_layout Standard
48794 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
48799 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
48800 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
48804 \begin_layout Subsection
48806 \begin_inset Index idx
48809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48816 \begin_inset Index idx
48819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48820 Settings ! Shortcuts
48828 \begin_layout Standard
48833 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
48835 Several binding files are available, among them:
48838 \begin_layout Description
48839 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
48842 \begin_layout Description
48843 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
48855 \begin_layout Description
48856 mac.bind a set of bindings for
48859 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48867 \begin_layout Standard
48868 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
48873 , and binding files for special languages.
48874 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
48875 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48879 \begin_inset space \space{}
48883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48891 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
48892 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
48893 will try to use the appropriate binding
48897 \begin_layout Standard
48898 Some binding files, like
48902 , only have a limited scope.
48903 When looking at the end of the file
48907 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
48910 \begin_layout Standard
48914 \begin_inset space ~
48918 \begin_inset space ~
48923 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
48924 in the selected key binding file.
48927 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48929 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48931 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
48936 \begin_inset Index idx
48939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48940 Key Bindings ! Editing
48948 \begin_layout Standard
48949 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
48950 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
48951 functions and the bound shortcuts.
48952 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
48955 Show key-bindings containing
48958 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
48959 Insert there for example as keyword
48960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48967 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
48968 functions that contain
48969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48977 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
48978 All \SpecialChar LyX
48979 functions are also listed in the file
48984 that you will find in the
48991 \begin_layout Standard
48992 For example, to add the shortcut
49000 , select the function and press the
49005 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
49006 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
49009 \begin_layout Standard
49010 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
49011 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
49013 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
49014 function names as a semicolon separated list.
49016 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
49021 \begin_layout Standard
49022 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
49025 \begin_layout Standard
49026 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
49028 The syntax of the entries is:
49031 \begin_layout Standard
49037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49056 \begin_layout Standard
49057 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
49058 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
49059 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49086 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
49087 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
49088 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
49089 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
49091 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
49095 , you needed to specify it as
49100 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
49103 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
49106 \begin_layout Subsection
49108 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49110 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
49115 \begin_inset Index idx
49118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49125 \begin_inset Index idx
49128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49129 Settings ! Keyboard Map
49137 \begin_layout Standard
49138 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
49139 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
49140 provides keyboard maps.
49141 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
49142 is a Romanian one, you can enable
49145 \begin_inset space ~
49149 \begin_inset space ~
49154 and select the keyboard map file named
49161 \begin_layout Standard
49170 keyboard map and, if you use the
49174 bindings, you can select the first and second with
49177 arg "keymap-primary"
49183 arg "keymap-secondary"
49186 respectively or toggle between them with
49189 arg "keymap-toggle"
49195 \begin_layout Standard
49196 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49204 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
49213 \begin_layout Standard
49214 You can also specify the mouse
49216 Wheel scrolling speed
49219 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
49223 Middle mouse button pasting
49225 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
49226 inserts the content of the clipboard.
49229 \begin_layout Standard
49237 \begin_inset space ~
49241 \begin_inset space ~
49246 you can select a key for zooming.
49247 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
49250 \begin_layout Subsection
49254 \begin_layout Standard
49255 Input completion is described in section
49256 \begin_inset space ~
49260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49262 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
49269 \begin_layout Section
49271 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49278 \begin_inset Index idx
49281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49288 \begin_inset Index idx
49291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49300 \begin_layout Standard
49301 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
49302 are normally determined during
49304 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
49307 \begin_layout Description
49309 \begin_inset space ~
49312 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
49313 's working directory.
49314 It is the default when you
49325 \begin_inset space ~
49333 \begin_layout Description
49335 \begin_inset space ~
49338 templates This directory
49339 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
49340 contains the templates that are shown
49341 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
49342 will be opened when you use the menu
49343 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
49348 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49350 \begin_inset space ~
49354 \begin_inset space ~
49362 \begin_layout Description
49364 \begin_inset space ~
49367 files This directory
49368 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
49369 will be opened when you use the
49370 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
49371 contains the example files that are listed in
49374 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
49383 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49385 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
49387 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
49393 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
49395 \begin_inset Newline newline
49399 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49411 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
49412 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
49422 \begin_layout Description
49424 \begin_inset space ~
49428 \begin_inset Index idx
49431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49437 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
49438 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
49439 \begin_inset space ~
49443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49445 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
49453 will be used to save the backups.
49454 \begin_inset Newline newline
49457 Backup files have the ending
49458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49468 \begin_layout Description
49470 \begin_inset space ~
49473 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
49474 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
49476 \begin_inset Newline newline
49483 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49489 You can edit this file with the program
49498 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
49499 in its preferences under
49502 \begin_inset space ~
49508 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
49513 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
49515 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
49516 in your \SpecialChar LyX
49522 and \SpecialChar LyX
49523 need to be running the same time.
49524 \begin_inset Newline newline
49527 The pipe is also used for the
49531 feature, see section
49532 \begin_inset space ~
49536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49538 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
49543 \begin_inset Newline newline
49546 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
49547 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
49548 \begin_inset Newline newline
49564 \begin_layout Description
49566 \begin_inset space ~
49569 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
49572 \begin_layout Description
49574 \begin_inset space ~
49577 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
49578 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
49579 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
49582 \begin_layout Description
49584 \begin_inset space ~
49587 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
49593 You only need to specify it if you are using
49597 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
49599 For \SpecialChar LyX
49604 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
49608 \begin_layout Description
49610 \begin_inset space ~
49613 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
49614 When \SpecialChar LyX
49615 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
49616 to find it on the system.
49617 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
49619 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
49621 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49625 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49628 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
49629 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
49632 \begin_layout Description
49634 \begin_inset space ~
49637 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
49638 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
49639 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
49640 code or in the document
49642 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
49644 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
49645 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
49646 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
49647 scanned for the input files.
49648 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
49649 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
49651 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
49652 compilation may fail for some documents.
49655 \begin_layout Section
49659 \begin_layout Standard
49660 Here you can insert your
49669 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
49671 \begin_inset space ~
49675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49677 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
49681 , to mark changes you make as yours.
49684 \begin_layout Section
49686 \begin_inset Index idx
49689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49690 Language ! Settings
49696 \begin_inset Index idx
49699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49700 Settings ! Language
49708 \begin_layout Subsection
49710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49712 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
49719 \begin_layout Description
49721 \begin_inset space ~
49725 \begin_inset space ~
49728 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
49730 You can find its actual translation status here:
49731 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49733 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
49739 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
49743 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49745 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
49746 LaTeX Language Support
49751 \begin_layout Description
49753 \begin_inset space ~
49756 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
49757 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
49758 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
49759 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
49760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49776 The most widespread language package is
49781 \begin_inset Index idx
49784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49791 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
49793 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
49794 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
49795 come with the alternative
49801 \begin_inset Index idx
49804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49806 packages ! polyglossia
49811 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
49812 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
49818 The available selections are described in section
49819 \begin_inset space ~
49823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49825 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
49832 \begin_layout Description
49834 \begin_inset space ~
49838 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
49839 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
49840 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
49842 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
49846 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
49850 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
49852 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
49856 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
49857 that is used to switch to a different language
49858 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
49859 to start the package
49863 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
49864 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
49868 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
49869 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
49872 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
49876 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
49884 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
49892 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
49895 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
49897 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
49901 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
49919 selectlanguage{$$lang}
49920 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
49927 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
49928 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49933 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
49938 , this setting is ignored.
49943 \begin_layout Description
49945 \begin_inset space ~
49949 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
49956 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
49957 Use this if the language switch set in
49961 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
49965 's alternative command
49969 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
49970 \SpecialChar allowbreak
49973 end{otherlanguage*}
49977 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
49978 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
49979 command toggles the package on and off
49980 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
49981 Empty by default, as
49985 selectlanguage{$$lang}
49987 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
49992 selectlanguage{$$lang}
49998 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
50003 , this setting is ignored.
50008 \begin_layout Description
50010 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
50012 \begin_inset space ~
50016 \begin_inset space ~
50019 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
50023 \begin_layout Description
50025 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
50027 \begin_inset space ~
50031 \begin_inset space ~
50034 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
50040 \begin_layout Description
50042 \begin_inset space ~
50046 \begin_inset space ~
50050 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
50052 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
50055 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
50056 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
50059 to the document class options
50060 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
50061 rather than the language package options.
50062 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
50066 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
50067 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
50069 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
50070 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
50072 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
50077 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
50078 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
50087 \begin_layout Description
50089 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
50091 \begin_inset space ~
50095 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
50097 \begin_inset space ~
50101 \begin_inset space ~
50105 \begin_inset space ~
50111 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
50113 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
50116 this option is set,
50117 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
50118 the language switch defined in
50121 \begin_inset space ~
50126 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
50127 to the document language.
50128 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
50129 This might be needed if you use a non-default
50132 \begin_inset space ~
50137 or if a package resets the document language.
50138 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
50139 usually should be the document language).
50140 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
50141 documents start with the chosen document language.
50142 When this option is not set, the
50145 \begin_inset space ~
50150 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50152 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
50155 \begin_inset space ~
50165 \begin_layout Description
50167 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
50169 \begin_inset space ~
50173 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
50175 \begin_inset space ~
50179 \begin_inset space ~
50183 \begin_inset space ~
50189 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
50193 \begin_inset space ~
50197 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
50198 Set document language explicitly
50204 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
50206 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
50212 \begin_inset space ~
50218 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
50220 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
50224 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
50226 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
50229 the end of the document.
50230 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
50234 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50235 \paragraph_spacing single
50237 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
50243 \begin_layout Description
50245 \begin_inset space ~
50249 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
50251 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
50255 \begin_inset space ~
50259 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
50261 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
50263 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
50267 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
50270 in a language different
50271 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
50273 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
50276 the document language will be
50277 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
50278 marked (by default with a blue
50281 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
50283 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
50287 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
50291 \begin_layout Description
50293 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
50295 \begin_inset space ~
50299 \begin_inset space ~
50303 \begin_inset space ~
50306 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
50307 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
50308 switched via the operating system.
50309 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
50311 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50314 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
50315 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
50320 \begin_layout Description
50322 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
50324 \begin_inset space ~
50328 \begin_inset space ~
50331 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
50332 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
50337 \begin_layout Description
50339 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
50341 \begin_inset space ~
50345 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
50347 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
50351 \begin_inset space ~
50355 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
50356 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
50357 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
50359 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
50363 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
50365 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
50366 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
50368 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
50369 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
50370 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
50372 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
50377 \begin_layout Standard
50382 means that the cursor
50383 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
50384 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
50385 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
50387 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50390 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
50391 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
50395 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
50397 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
50398 specific case always means: move
50402 in text (even if this means:
50408 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
50409 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
50410 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
50411 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
50412 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
50413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50424 \begin_layout Standard
50426 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
50431 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
50432 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
50433 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
50437 ) when coming from the left.
50438 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
50440 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
50441 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
50442 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
50447 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50449 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
50453 \begin_layout Description
50455 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
50457 \begin_inset space ~
50461 \begin_inset space ~
50464 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
50465 separator alignment).
50466 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
50468 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50471 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
50472 (static) custom character here.
50475 \begin_layout Description
50477 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
50479 \begin_inset space ~
50483 \begin_inset space ~
50486 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
50492 \begin_layout Subsection
50496 \begin_layout Standard
50497 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
50498 \begin_inset space ~
50502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50504 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
50511 \begin_layout Section
50515 \begin_layout Subsection
50517 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50519 name "subsec:General-output"
50526 \begin_layout Description
50528 \begin_inset space ~
50531 search Commands that will be used for the menu
50533 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
50535 \begin_inset space ~
50541 For a detailed description see section
50543 Reverse DVI/PDF search
50548 \begin_inset space ~
50556 \begin_layout Description
50558 \begin_inset space ~
50561 Options Options for the program
50565 that is used for the export format
50570 \begin_inset space ~
50574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50576 reference "subsec:Export"
50581 Possible options are listed in the
50586 \begin_inset Newline newline
50590 \begin_inset Flex URL
50593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50595 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
50605 \begin_layout Description
50607 \begin_inset space ~
50611 \begin_inset space ~
50614 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
50617 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50618 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
50620 \begin_inset space ~
50626 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
50629 \begin_layout Description
50631 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
50633 \begin_inset space ~
50637 \begin_inset Index idx
50640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50647 \begin_inset Index idx
50650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50651 Settings ! Date format
50656 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
50657 \begin_inset Newline newline
50661 \begin_inset Flex URL
50664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50666 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
50672 \begin_inset Newline newline
50675 For example the format
50676 \begin_inset Newline newline
50680 \begin_inset Newline newline
50683 prints the date as day/month/year.
50688 \begin_layout Description
50690 \begin_inset space ~
50694 \begin_inset space ~
50697 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
50698 is allowed to overwrite on export.
50701 \begin_layout Subsection
50707 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50709 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
50714 \begin_inset Index idx
50717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50718 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
50727 \begin_layout Description
50729 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
50731 \begin_inset space ~
50739 \begin_inset space ~
50743 \begin_inset space ~
50746 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
50751 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
50772 are used for Cyrillic.
50773 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
50774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50786 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
50788 sets up in the background.
50789 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
50794 \begin_layout Description
50796 \begin_inset space ~
50800 \begin_inset space ~
50804 \begin_inset space ~
50808 \begin_inset space ~
50811 options They only have an effect when the program
50815 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
50818 \begin_layout Standard
50819 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
50820 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
50821 manuals of the applications.
50824 \begin_layout Description
50826 \begin_inset space ~
50829 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
50830 \begin_inset space ~
50834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50836 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
50843 \begin_layout Description
50845 \begin_inset space ~
50848 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
50849 \begin_inset space ~
50853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50855 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
50862 \begin_layout Description
50864 \begin_inset space ~
50867 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
50868 \begin_inset space ~
50872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50874 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
50881 \begin_layout Description
50887 \begin_inset space ~
50890 command Command for the program
50892 Check\SpecialChar TeX
50895 that is described in the section
50897 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
50902 Additional Features
50907 \begin_layout Standard
50908 There are additionally the following options:
50911 \begin_layout Description
50913 \begin_inset space ~
50917 \begin_inset space ~
50921 \begin_inset space ~
50925 \begin_inset space ~
50930 \begin_inset space ~
50933 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
50934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50951 to separate folders.
50952 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
50954 \begin_inset Index idx
50957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50964 \begin_inset Index idx
50967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50976 \begin_layout Description
50978 \begin_inset space ~
50982 \begin_inset space ~
50986 \begin_inset space ~
50990 \begin_inset space ~
50994 \begin_inset space ~
50998 \begin_inset space ~
51001 changes Removes all manually set
51007 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51008 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51010 \begin_inset space ~
51015 dialog when changing the document class.
51018 \begin_layout Section
51020 \begin_inset space ~
51024 \begin_inset Index idx
51027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51036 \begin_layout Subsection
51038 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51040 name "subsec:Converters"
51045 \begin_inset Index idx
51048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51057 \begin_layout Standard
51058 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
51059 from one format to another.
51060 You can modify converters or create new ones.
51061 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
51068 \begin_inset space ~
51073 field and press the
51078 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
51082 \begin_inset space ~
51087 drop-down list, modify the
51091 field and press the
51098 \begin_layout Standard
51101 Converter File Cache
51107 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
51109 Maximum Age (in days
51112 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
51113 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
51116 \begin_layout Standard
51117 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
51118 definition, is described in the section
51129 \begin_layout Subsection
51131 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51133 name "sec:File-Formats"
51138 \begin_inset Index idx
51141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51148 \begin_inset Index idx
51151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51160 \begin_layout Standard
51161 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
51171 programs that should be used for certain formats.
51174 \begin_layout Standard
51175 You can also define the
51177 Default output format
51179 that is used when you use
51181 View, Update, View Master Document
51185 Update Master Document
51191 menu or the toolbar.
51194 \begin_layout Standard
51195 More about formats and their options is described in the section
51206 \begin_layout Standard
51207 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
51209 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
51210 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
51211 This is done by specifying a
51216 More about this is described in the section
51227 \begin_layout Chapter
51228 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
51230 \begin_inset Index idx
51233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51240 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51242 name "chap:Units-available-in"
51249 \begin_layout Standard
51251 \begin_inset space ~
51255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51257 reference "tab:Units"
51261 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
51262 and used in this documentation.
51265 \begin_layout Standard
51266 \begin_inset Float table
51273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51274 \begin_inset Caption Standard
51276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51277 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51292 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
51298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51300 \begin_inset Tabular
51301 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
51302 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
51303 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51304 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
51305 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51351 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51355 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51388 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51454 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51458 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
51462 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51619 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51623 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51656 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51660 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51693 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51697 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51729 scaled point (65536
51730 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51734 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51797 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
51802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51921 % of original image width
51926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52010 \begin_layout Standard
52011 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
52014 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
52021 \begin_layout Bibliography
52022 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52023 LatexCommand bibitem
52030 The \SpecialChar LyX
52032 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52035 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
52041 \begin_inset Newline newline
52045 \begin_inset Flex URL
52048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52050 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
52058 \begin_layout Bibliography
52059 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52060 LatexCommand bibitem
52061 key "latexcompanion"
52066 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
52068 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
52069 Companion Second Edition.
52072 Addison-Wesley, 2004
52075 \begin_layout Bibliography
52076 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52077 LatexCommand bibitem
52083 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
52086 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
52090 Addison-Wesley, 2003
52093 \begin_layout Bibliography
52094 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52095 LatexCommand bibitem
52104 : A Document Preparation System.
52107 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
52110 \begin_layout Bibliography
52111 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52112 LatexCommand bibitem
52122 The \SpecialChar TeX
52126 Addison-Wesley, 1984
52129 \begin_layout Bibliography
52130 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52131 LatexCommand bibitem
52137 The \SpecialChar TeX
52139 \begin_inset Newline newline
52143 \begin_inset Flex URL
52146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52148 https://ctan.org/topic
52156 \begin_layout Bibliography
52157 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52158 LatexCommand bibitem
52164 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
52166 \begin_inset Newline newline
52170 \begin_inset Flex URL
52173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52175 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
52183 \begin_layout Bibliography
52184 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52185 LatexCommand bibitem
52192 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52194 name "Documentation"
52195 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
52202 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52206 \begin_inset Newline newline
52210 \begin_inset Flex URL
52213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52215 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
52223 \begin_layout Bibliography
52224 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52225 LatexCommand bibitem
52232 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52234 name "Documentation"
52235 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
52240 how to use the program
52242 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52246 \begin_inset Newline newline
52250 \begin_inset Flex URL
52253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52255 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
52263 \begin_layout Bibliography
52264 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52265 LatexCommand bibitem
52272 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52274 name "Documentation"
52275 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
52280 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52286 \begin_inset Index idx
52289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52291 packages ! biblatex
52297 \begin_inset Newline newline
52301 \begin_inset Flex URL
52304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52306 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
52314 \begin_layout Bibliography
52315 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52316 LatexCommand bibitem
52323 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52325 name "Documentation"
52326 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
52331 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52337 \begin_inset Index idx
52340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52348 \begin_inset Newline newline
52352 \begin_inset Flex URL
52355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52357 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
52365 \begin_layout Bibliography
52366 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52367 LatexCommand bibitem
52374 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52376 name "Documentation"
52377 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
52387 \begin_inset Newline newline
52391 \begin_inset Flex URL
52394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52396 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
52404 \begin_layout Bibliography
52405 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52406 LatexCommand bibitem
52407 key "makeindex-man"
52413 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52416 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
52426 \begin_inset Newline newline
52430 \begin_inset Flex URL
52433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52435 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
52443 \begin_layout Bibliography
52444 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52445 LatexCommand bibitem
52452 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52454 name "Documentation"
52455 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
52465 \begin_inset Newline newline
52469 \begin_inset Flex URL
52472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52474 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
52482 \begin_layout Bibliography
52483 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52484 LatexCommand bibitem
52491 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52493 name "Documentation"
52494 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
52499 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
52501 \begin_inset Newline newline
52505 \begin_inset Flex URL
52508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52510 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
52518 \begin_layout Bibliography
52519 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52520 LatexCommand bibitem
52527 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52529 name "Documentation"
52530 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
52535 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52541 \begin_inset Index idx
52544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52552 \begin_inset Newline newline
52556 \begin_inset Flex URL
52559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52561 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
52569 \begin_layout Bibliography
52570 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52571 LatexCommand bibitem
52578 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52580 name "Documentation"
52581 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
52586 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52592 \begin_inset Index idx
52595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52597 packages ! enumitem
52603 \begin_inset Newline newline
52607 \begin_inset Flex URL
52610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52612 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
52620 \begin_layout Bibliography
52621 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52622 LatexCommand bibitem
52629 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52631 name "Documentation"
52632 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
52637 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52643 \begin_inset Index idx
52646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52648 packages ! fancyhdr
52654 \begin_inset Newline newline
52658 \begin_inset Flex URL
52661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52663 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
52671 \begin_layout Bibliography
52672 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52673 LatexCommand bibitem
52680 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52682 name "Documentation"
52683 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
52688 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52694 \begin_inset Index idx
52697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52699 packages ! hyperref
52705 \begin_inset Newline newline
52709 \begin_inset Flex URL
52712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52714 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
52722 \begin_layout Bibliography
52723 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52724 LatexCommand bibitem
52731 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52733 name "Documentation"
52734 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
52739 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52745 \begin_inset Index idx
52748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52750 packages ! microtype
52756 \begin_inset Newline newline
52760 \begin_inset Flex URL
52763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52765 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
52773 \begin_layout Bibliography
52774 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52775 LatexCommand bibitem
52782 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52784 name "Documentation"
52785 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
52790 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52796 \begin_inset Index idx
52799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52807 \begin_inset Newline newline
52811 \begin_inset Flex URL
52814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52816 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
52824 \begin_layout Bibliography
52825 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52826 LatexCommand bibitem
52833 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52835 name "Documentation"
52836 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
52841 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52847 \begin_inset Index idx
52850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52852 packages ! prettyref
52858 \begin_inset Newline newline
52862 \begin_inset Flex URL
52865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52867 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
52875 \begin_layout Bibliography
52876 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52877 LatexCommand bibitem
52884 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52886 name "Documentation"
52887 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
52892 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52898 \begin_inset Index idx
52901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52903 packages ! refstyle
52909 \begin_inset Newline newline
52913 \begin_inset Flex URL
52916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52918 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
52926 \begin_layout Bibliography
52927 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52928 LatexCommand bibitem
52935 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52938 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
52943 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52945 \begin_inset Newline newline
52949 \begin_inset Flex URL
52952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52954 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
52962 \begin_layout Bibliography
52963 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52964 LatexCommand bibitem
52971 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52974 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
52979 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52981 \begin_inset Newline newline
52985 \begin_inset Flex URL
52988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52990 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
52998 \begin_layout Bibliography
52999 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53000 LatexCommand bibitem
53007 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53010 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
53015 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53016 for Cyrillic languages:
53017 \begin_inset Newline newline
53021 \begin_inset Flex URL
53024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53026 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
53034 \begin_layout Bibliography
53035 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53036 LatexCommand bibitem
53043 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53046 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
53051 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53053 \begin_inset Newline newline
53057 \begin_inset Flex URL
53060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53062 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
53070 \begin_layout Bibliography
53071 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53072 LatexCommand bibitem
53079 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53082 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
53087 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53089 \begin_inset Newline newline
53093 \begin_inset Flex URL
53096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53098 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
53106 \begin_layout Bibliography
53107 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53108 LatexCommand bibitem
53115 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53118 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
53123 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53125 \begin_inset Newline newline
53129 \begin_inset Flex URL
53132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53134 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
53142 \begin_layout Standard
53143 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
53150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53177 \begin_inset Note Note
53180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53187 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
53188 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
53189 bibliography is the second one:
53197 \begin_layout Standard
53198 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
53199 LatexCommand bibtex
53200 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
53201 options "biblio/alphadin"
53208 \begin_layout Standard
53209 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53213 \begin_layout Standard
53217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53223 pagedeclaration}[1]{
53226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53232 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
53240 \begin_inset Note Note
53243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53244 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
53245 \begin_inset space ~
53249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53251 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
53263 \begin_layout Standard
53264 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
53265 LatexCommand printnomenclature
53271 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
53272 LatexCommand printindex